Panasonic DMREH770 Operating Instructions

EH770EC.book 1 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No.
DMR-EH770
Region number supported by
this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders
and DVD-Video according to where they are
sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
ALL
2
3
5
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the
following countries:
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/
Luxembourg/Netherlands/Spain/Switzerland
(As of end of June 2007)
≥This service may not be available in some
areas in the above countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.
EC
RQT9011-L
EH770EC.book 2 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
SUOMI
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO
USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION!
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VAROITUS:
VÄHENNÄ TULIPALON, SÄHKÖISKUN TAI LAITTEISTON
VAHINGOITTUMISEN VAARAA
≥TÄTÄ LAITETTA EI SAA ALTISTAA SATEELLE,
KOSTEUDELLE, ROISKEILLE TAI TIPPUVILLE NESTEILLE.
LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE EI SAA MYÖSKÄÄN ASETTAA MITÄÄN
NESTEELLÄ TÄYTETTYÄ ESINETTÄ, KUTEN MALJAKKOA.
≥KÄYTÄ VAIN SUOSITELTUJA LISÄVARUSTEITA.
≥ÄLÄ IRROTA KANTTA (TAI TAUSTAA). SISÄLLÄ EI OLE
KÄYTTÄJÄN HUOLLETTAVISSA OLEVIA OSIA. HUOLLON
SAA SUORITTAA VAIN AMMATTITAITOINEN
HENKILÖKUNTA.
VAROITUS!
≥ÄLÄ ASENNA TAI LAITA TÄTÄ LAITETTA
KABINETTITYYPPISEEN KIRJAKAAPPIIN TAI MUUHUN
SULJETTUUN TILAAN, JOTTA TUULETUS ONNISTUISI.
VARMISTA, ETTÄ VERHO TAI MIKÄÄN MUU MATERIAALI
EI HUONONNA TUULETUSTA, JOTTA VÄLTETTÄISIIN
YLIKUUMENEMISESTA JOHTUVA SÄHKÖISKU- TAI
TULIPALOVAARA.
≥ÄLÄ PEITÄ LAITTEEN TUULETUSAUKKOJA
SANOMALEHDELLÄ, PÖYTÄLIINALLA, VERHOLLA TAI
MUULLA VASTAAVALLA ESINEELLÄ.
≥ÄLÄ ASETA PALAVAA KYNTTILÄÄ TAI MUUTA AVOTULEN
LÄHDETTÄ LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE.
≥HÄVITÄ PARISTOT LUONTOA VAHINGOITTAMATTOMALLA
TAVALLA.
TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI LEUDOSSA
ILMASTOSSA.
Pistorasia tulee asentaa laitteen lähelle helppopääsyiseen
paikkaan.
Verkkojohdon pistokkeen on oltava aina helposti käytettävissä.
Tämä laite voidaan kytkeä kokonaan irti verkkovirrasta
irrottamalla verkkojohdon pistoke pistorasiasta.
NORSK
ADVARSEL!
DETTE PRODUKTET ANVENDER EN LASER.
BETJENING AV KONTROLLER, JUSTERINGER ELLER
ANDRE INNGREP ENN DE SOM ER BESKREVET I DENNE
BRUKSANVISNING, KAN FØRE TIL FARLIG BESTRÅLING.
DEKSLER MÅ IKKE ÅPNES, OG FORSØK ALDRI Å
REPARERE APPARATET PÅ EGENHÅND. ALT SERVICE OG
REPARASJONSARBEID MÅ UTFØRES AV KVALIFISERT
PERSONELL.
ADVARSEL:
FØLG NEDENSTÅENDE INSTRUKSER FOR Å REDUSERE
RISIKOEN FOR BRANN, ELEKTRISK STØT OG SKADE PÅ
PRODUKTET:
≥DETTE APPARATET MÅ IKKE UTSETTES FOR REGN,
FUKTIGHET, DRYPP ELLER SPRUT, OG INGEN
VÆSKEFYLTE GJENSTANDER, SOM F.EKS. VASER, MÅ
PLASSERES PÅ APPARATET.
≥BRUK KUN ANBEFALT TILBEHØR.
≥IKKE FJERN DEKSELET (ELLER BAKSIDEN); APPARATET
INNEHOLDER INGEN DELER SOM KAN SKIFTES ELLER
REPARERES AV BRUKEREN. OVERLAT TIL KVALIFISERTE
SERVICETEKNIKERE Å UTFØRE SERVICE.
ADVARSEL!
≥APPARATET MÅ IKKE PLASSERES I EN BOKHYLLE, ET
INNEBYGGET KABINETT ELLER ET ANNET LUKKET STED
HVOR VENTILASJONSFORHOLDENE ER UTILSTREKKELIGE.
SØRG FOR AT GARDINER ELLER LIGNENDE IKKE
FORVERRER VENTILASJONSFORHOLDENE, SÅ RISIKO FOR
ELEKTRISK SJOKK ELLER BRANN FORÅRSAKET AV
OVERHETING UNNGÅS.
≥APPARATETS VENTILASJONSÅPNINGER MÅ IKKE DEKKES
TIL MED AVISER, BORDDUKER , GARDINER OG LIGNENDE.
≥PLASSER IKKE ÅPEN ILD, SLIK SOM LEVENDE LYS, OPPÅ
APPARATET.
≥BRUKTE BATTERIER MÅ KASSERES UTEN FARE FOR
MILJØET.
DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER
MODERATE KLIMAFORHOLD.
RQT9011
2
(Inside of product)
(Tuotteen sisällä)
(Produktets innside)
Strømuttaket må befinne seg i nærheten av utstyret og være lett
tilgjengelig.
Støpslet på strømkabelen må være klart til bruk.
Når dette apparatet skal kobles helt fra strømnettet (AC), må
støpslet på strømkabelen trekkes ut av stikkontakten.
EH770EC.book 3 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Table of contents
Editing
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Creating playlists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
49
49
49
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
GUIDE Plus+ data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Editing programme lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Changing the settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying
Set up to match your television and
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory
—Copy All Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Recording music from CD and play on HDD . . . . . . . . 61
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make timer recordings. . . . .
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . . .
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . .
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPS/PDC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
31
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
Recording broadcasts from external equipment. . . . . 35
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Recording from digital/satellite receiver or decoder . . . . . . . . . . 35
Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(digital/satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Playing back
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing DivX files, MP3 files and
still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG) . . . . .
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
40
40
41
42
43
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Editing
27
28
28
29
29
Music Server
Convenient functions
HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all the contents of a disc—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the background style—Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . .
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TV System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
62
62
63
63
64
64
64
64
65
66
66
67
67
67
71
73
73
Copying
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . .
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Server
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Playing back
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Recording
Album and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link). . . . . . . . . . . 18
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
GUIDE Plus+ system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Recording
Getting
started
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Convenient
functions
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reference
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover
Reference
Getting started
HDD, disc and USB memory information . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disc handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
About descriptions in these operating instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ {{”.
RQT9011
3
EH770EC.book 4 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
HDD, disc and USB memory information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
Disc type
DVD-RAM
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm
Hard disk drive (HDD)
≥400 GB
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions by
[HDD]
[RAM]
DVD Video Recording format
Recording format
Data that can be recorded
and played
This is a recording format which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
Video
Still pictures (JPEG)
Music
Video
Still pictures (JPEG)
Re-writable
≤
≤
Play on other players§2
–
Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
–
Up to 5X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
≤
≤ [CPRM (➡ 84) compatible discs only.]
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4
≤
≤
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
≤
≤
Creating and editing
playlists
≤
≤
Disc type
DVD-R§1
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
DVD-R DL§1
(dual layer on single side)
≥You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
Logo
Indicated in these
instructions by
[-R] before finalisation
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
DVD-Video format
Recording format
Data that can be recorded
and played
This recording format is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Video
Video
Video
–
–
≤
Only after finalising the disc (➡ 64, 84).
Only on DVD-R DL compatible
players after finalising the disc
(➡ 64, 84).
Only after finalising the disc
(➡ 64, 84).
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 8X recording speed discs.
Up to 6X recording speed discs.
–
–
–
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 68, Bilingual
Audio Selection)]
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 68,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 68,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
≤
≤
≤
Creating and editing
playlists
–
–
–
Re-writable
Play on other players§2
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
What you can do on this unit (≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4
RQT9011
4
(continued on the next page)
EH770EC.book 5 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
Disc type
Logo
Indicated in these
instructions by
+R DL§1
(double layer on single side)
≥You cannot directly record to a
+R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
+R§1 §5
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
–
–
[+R] before finalisation
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+RW
–
[+RW]
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format
Recording format
Data that can be recorded
and played
This is a format for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this format in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video
format.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the disc on DVD players and other equipment.
Video
Video
Video
–
–
≤
Only after finalising the disc (➡ 64, 84).
Only on +R DL compatible players
after finalising the disc (➡ 64, 84).
Only on +RW compatible players.
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 8X recording speed discs.
Up to 4X recording speed discs.§6
–
–
–
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 68,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 68,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 68,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
– (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
– (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
– (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
–
–
–
Re-writable
Play on other players§2
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
HDD, disc and USB memory information
(continued)
What you can do on this unit (≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
Creating and editing playlists
§1
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use discs that can only be used for
recording once.
§2 [RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD Recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
§3 The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.
§4 For further information (➡ 8, Important notes for recording)
[Note]
§5
§6
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 68).
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are
finalised are compatible and can be played.
You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. (➡ 64)
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (➡ 63)
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the remainder is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same
way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers.
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
Second recordable layer
The available
space
(Inner
section of the
disc)
First recordable layer
DVD-R DL
+R DL
Title 1
Title 2
Playback direction
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times (➡ 27)
(Outer section
of the disc)
RQT9011
5
EH770EC.book 6 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
HDD, disc and USB memory information
Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)
Disc type
DVD-Video
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)
Logo
Indicated in
these
[DVD-V]
instructions by
Instructions
High quality movie and music discs
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
≥You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they have been
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 63) the disc, you can record to it in DVD-Video format and play it on
this unit.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.
.
Disc type
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
CD
Logo
Indicated in
these
DivX, MP3, JPEG
DivX, MP3, JPEG
instructions by
Instructions
≥DVD-R§ with video ≥DVD-R DL§ with
recorded in DivX
video recorded in
DivX
≥DVD-R§ with music
recorded in MP3
≥DVD-R DL§ with
§ with still
music recorded in
≥DVD-R
MP3
pictures recorded in
JPEG
≥DVD-R DL§ with still
pictures recorded in
JPEG
Video CD
SVCD
–
[CD]
DivX, MP3, JPEG
Recorded audio
and music
(including CD-R/
RW§)
≥You can record
tracks to this
unit’s HDD.
≥CD-R and CD-RW§
with video recorded in
DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW§
with music recorded in
MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW§
with still pictures
recorded in JPEG
[VCD]
Recorded music and video
(including CD-R/RW§)
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit
and not finalised (➡ 84).
≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
≥DVD-Audio
≥Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SACD, MV-Disc, PD
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
Yes/No
PAL
≤
NTSC
≤
PAL
≤
NTSC
≤§1 (PAL60)
PAL
–
NTSC
≤§2
Multi-system TV
PAL TV
NTSC TV
§1
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 73).
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (➡ 73).
RQT9011
6
EH770EC.book 7 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Compatible USB
memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class:
–USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed.§
§
USB memories for USB 2.0 High Speed work as USB 2.0 Full Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 32 GB can be used.
Format
FAT 16 and FAT 32 file systems are supported.
Indicated in these
instructions by
[USB]
Data that can be played or copied (≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
File format
MP3 (➡ 39)
Still pictures (JPEG) (➡ 39)
Playing
≤
≤
Copying to HDD
–
≤
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto
the USB memory device. (➡ 41)
You can play and copy to HDD still pictures recorded
with a computer onto the USB memory device. (➡ 42,
59)
Instructions
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
HDD, disc and USB memory information
USB memories you can use on this unit
[Note]
≥This unit does not support to charge the USB device.
RQT9011
7
EH770EC.book 8 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Important notes for recording
When recording a
bilingual programme
[HDD] [RAM]
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 38, Changing audio during play)
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
(➡ 68, Bilingual Audio Selection)
M1
However in the following cases, select whether to
record the main or secondary audio:
–Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 69, Audio Mode for
XP Recording)
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The
default setting is “On”. ➡ 68)
M1
M2
Hello
Hallo
Hello
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
If you record from external equipment
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
If you record from external equipment
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the external
equipment.
About the aspect when
recording a programme
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic”
➡ 68), the programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including when
recording started at a commercial, etc.). If recorded
with a different aspect, select the correct aspect
(“16:9” or “4:3”).
[+R] [+RW]
Recorded in 4:3 aspect
However, in the following case, programme will be
recorded in 4:3.
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5
hours or longer)” recording modes will be recorded in
4:3 aspect.
When you want to copy
titles in high speed
mode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 68)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings
(➡ above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.
§ Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Record to the HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
HDD
When recording the
“One time only
recording” broadcasts
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 84) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
`
[HDD]
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (➡ 64).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
§You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
CHG
Í /I
Í
DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL
SEARCH
ENTER
VOL
DISPLAY
TOP
Finalise
MENU
RETURN
MENU
ON
OFF
DC
IN
9V
OPEN
UND
A.SURRO
REPEAT
MODE
MONITOR
MODE
PICTURE
Recording to DVD-R DL
and +R DL
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
RQT9011
8
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
∫
;
1
:/6
5/9
DISC EXCHANGE
DISC SKIP
<OPEN/CLOSE
EH770EC.book 9 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the HDD has been automatically entered energy save mode (➡ below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
≥Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette
DO NOT
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
This unit
≥Place in an area where condensation
VCR
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating
for a short time.)
Important notes for recording/HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ The HDD automatically enters energy save mode
The HDD has been automatically entered energy save mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be entered energy save mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the
disc tray.)
≥While in energy save mode play or recording may not start right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.
≥When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the energy save mode.
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
RQT9011
9
EH770EC.book 10 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Disc handling
∫ How to hold a disc
∫ Handling precautions
Do not touch the recorded surface.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
DO NOT
shapes.
DO
DO NOT
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
DO
DO NOT
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by
such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the
region.
RQT9011
10
DO NOT
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
EH770EC.book 11 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Included accessories
∏
∏
∏
∏
∏
1 AC mains lead
≥For use with this unit only. Do
not use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
2 RF coaxial cables
2 Batteries
for remote control
1 Audio/video
cable
(N2QAYB000124)
1 Remote control
The remote control information
∫ Batteries
∫ Use
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
≥When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.
Remote control signal sensor
20
30
R6/LR6, AA
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
≥Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
20
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
Disc handling/Unit care/Included accessories/The remote control information
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of July 2007. These may be subject to change.)
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
RQT9011
11
EH770EC.book 12 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
>
DVD
1
2
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
?
AV
PAGE
3
4
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
@
A
B
C
SLOW/SEARCH
5
STOP
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
OPTION
<
=
RQT9011
12
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
:
;
OK
M
CTION ENU
FUN
9
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
6
7
8
PAUSE
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
1 Turn the unit on (➡ 20)
2 Select drive (HDD or DVD) (➡ 26, 36, 42)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unnecessary recorded titles or still pictures (➡ 52)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 38)
8 Show Top Menu/DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 36, 37, 46)
9 Show OPTION menu (➡ 46)
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
: Colour buttons for switching between Video/Picture and Video/
Playlists, selecting character type when entering text, manual
tuning settings and GUIDE Plus+ operations
(➡ 31, 36, 55, 65, 71)
; Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (➡ 26)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 26)
≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(➡ 35)
≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV recording (➡ 18)
< Select audio (➡ 38)
= Show Status messages (➡ 45)
> Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (➡ 24)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ system
(➡ 26, 31)
A Show SHOWVIEW screen (➡ 32)
B Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV) (➡ 35, 60)
C Show Timer Recording screen (➡ 32)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen (➡ 21, 30)
F Show FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 66)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (➡ 38)
I Skip approx. 30 seconds forward (➡ 38)
J Skip the specified time (➡ 38)
K Show on-screen menu (➡ 44)
EH770EC.book 13 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Main unit
4
3
2
5
6
REC
7
Opening the front panel
8 9
:
OPEN/CLOSE
;
<
REC
Place your finger on the protruding section below the 4 and
press down to flip open the front panel.
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 20)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (➡ 26, 36)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 60)
4 USB port (➡ below)
5 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (➡ 16, 60)
6 Display (➡ below)
7 Channel select (➡ 26)
8
9
:
;
<
Control reference guide
1
Stop (➡ 26, 37)
Start play (➡ 36)
Start recording (➡ 26)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 28)
Open/close disc tray (➡ 26, 36)
Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (➡ 14–17)
Inserting, removing the USB memory device
You can insert the USB memory device directly into the USB port.
Preparation
Before inserting any USB memory device to this unit, ensure that the data stored therein has been backed up.
Inserting the USB memory device
Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it straight in.
“USB” appears on the unit’s display and the menu (➡ below) is automatically displayed, when a compatible
USB memory device is inserted while stopped.
USB device
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
Play MP3
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
RETURN
OK
You can proceed to each operation screen.
≥“Play MP3”:
“To play MP3 files on the USB memory” (➡ 41)
≥“Play Pictures (JPEG)”: “To play still pictures on the USB memory”
(➡ 42)
≥“Copy Pictures (JPEG)”: “Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures” (➡ 59)
Compatible USB
memory device
Removing the USB memory device
Complete all USB memory-related operations and pull the USB memory straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may be damaged.
The unit’s display
2
1
3
4
REC
PLAY
8
7
6
5
1 Copying indicator
Lights during copy.
2 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
3
Recording
indicator
REC
Playback
indicator
PLAY
Recording/
Playback indicator
REC
PLAY
4 Timer recording indicator
5 Disc indicator
Lights when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted in the
tray.
≥Indicators for functions that this unit does not support will not light.
6 Drive (HDD or DVD) indicator
Lights when the HDD or DVD drive is selected.
7 Main display section indicator
8 Recording mode indicator
RQT9011
13
EH770EC.book 14 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
STEP 1 Connection
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➡ 18).
≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (➡ 85).
[Required]setting] “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 70)
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–D. Confirm connections not listed below with your dealer.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.
A
Connecting a television
Television’s rear panel
To the aerial
Aerial
cable
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
1 2
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16, 17)
AV
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
3
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
4
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Y
PB
RF
OUT
OUT
AV1
(TV)
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
PR
OPTICAL
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OU
OUT
T
This unit’s rear panel
B
Connecting a television and VCR
Television’s rear panel
To the aerial
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
4
2
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart
terminal (➡ 16, 17)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
5
RF coaxial cable
(included)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
RF
IN
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
6
Cooling fan
Y
PB
RF
OUT
OUT
AV1
(TV)
PR
OPTICAL
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OU
OUT
T
This unit’s rear panel
RF coaxial cable
(included)
2
3
1
21-pin Scart
cable
Aerial cable
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector
or video cassette recorder to the television,
video signal will be affected by copyright
protection systems and the picture may not
be shown correctly.
DO NOT
Television
VCR
AV
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RQT9011
14
RF OUT
VCR’s
rear panel
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup
menu (➡ 70)
This unit
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are
both television and VCR input terminals.
EH770EC.book 15 ページ
C
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
1 2
VHF/UHF
RF IN
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
AV
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16, 17)
RF coaxial cable
(included)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
3
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
5
STEP 1 Connection
Connecting a television and digital/satellite receiver or decoder
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Y
PB
RF
OUT
OUT
AV1
(TV)
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
PR
OPTICAL
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OU
OUT
T
This unit’s rear panel
4
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the
Setup menu (➡ 70)
21-pin Scart cable
AV
Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel
D
Connecting a television and VCR, digital/satellite receiver or decoder
Television’s rear panel
To the aerial
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
5
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
6
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
RF coaxial cable
(included)
RF
IN
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16, 17)
7
Cooling fan
Y
PB
OUT
AV1
(TV)
RF
OUT
PR
OPTICAL
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OU
OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OU
OUT
T
This unit’s rear panel
RF coaxial cable
(included)
21-pin Scart cable
2
4
3
1
Aerial cable
AV
VCR’s rear
panel
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
RF OUT
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup menu (➡ 70)
Connect the unit directly to the television (➡ 14, [B] )
AV
Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel
RQT9011
15
EH770EC.book 16 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
STEP 1 Connection
Other connections
§
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.
Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO or
S VIDEO terminals
Connecting a VCR with AUDIO/VIDEO or
S VIDEO terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
Television’s rear panel
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the VIDEO
terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN
This unit’s front panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN
Red White Yellow
Red White
§
Yellow White Red
S Video
cable
Audio/Video cable
(included)
S Video
cable
Audio/Video cable
(included)
§
Red White
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
AV O
S VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
Red White
Red White Yellow
OUT
Red White Yellow
VIDEO
White Red
§
§
R-AUDIO-L
This unit’s front panel
VIDEO
AV O
S VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
R
L
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT OUT
R
L VIDEO S VIDEO
AUDIO OUT OUT
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VCR’s rear panel
VCR’s rear panel
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
Television’s rear panel
Y
AUDIO IN
R
L
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
PB
Red White
PR
Component
Video cable
§
§
RF
IN
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 85) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Use component output with progressive “Off” (The default setting
➡ 70), even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive
output can cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system
televisions using PAL mode.
CRT
Y
Red White
PB
DO NOT
AV1
(TV)
OPTICAL
OUT
RF
OUT
PR
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
VIDEO
Progressive output
S VIDEO
This unit
This unit’s rear panel
For progressive output (➡ 24)
Connecting an amplifier or system component
∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 69)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an Optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
Amplifier’s rear panel
∫ Connecting a stereo amplifier
Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R L
OPTICAL IN
Red White
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
Y
Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.
Audio cable
PB
RQT9011
16
PR
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
Red White
OUT
This unit’s rear panel
OUT
AV1
(TV)
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
EH770EC.book 17 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [➡ 18, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television
AV
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following
functions are available.
≥Direct TV Recording (➡ 18)
≥Watching pictures from digital/satellite receiver or
decoder
(In this case, make sure to switch the
television input to “AV”.)
Television’s
rear panel
HDMI IN
Fully wired
21-pin Scart cable
RF
IN
HDMI cable
Y
HDMI AV OUT
PB
AV1
(TV)
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
[Required]setting]
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”
(➡ 70).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
STEP 1 Connection
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), this unit’s output can be switched
to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
PR
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OUT
OUT
This unit’s rear panel
21-pin Scart cable
AV
Digital/satellite receiver or
decoder’s rear panel
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 84) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
Television’s rear panel
AV
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
➡ above
Fully wired
21-pin Scart cable
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Receiver’s rear
panel
HDMI cable
[Required]setting] ➡ above
RF
IN
Y
HDMI AV OUT
PB
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AV1
(TV)
PR
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OU
OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OUT
OUT
This unit’s rear panel
RQT9011
17
EH770EC.book 18 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control” or Q Link.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” ?
What is Q Link?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that
offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV
(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this
function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.
See the operating instructions for connected equipment for
operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as
HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function
that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with
other manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC
cannot be guaranteed.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.
“HDAVI Control 2” is the newest standard (current as of
February, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible
equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional HDAVI equipment.
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of
this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by
connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
Preparation
1. Connect this unit to your TV or receiver with an HDMI cable
(➡ 17).
2. Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 70). (The default setting is “On”.)
3. Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment
(e.g., TV).
≥When using HDMI2 terminal of VIERA as “HDAVI Control”,
set the input channel to HDMI2 on VIERA.
4. Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI
Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
Preparation
≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(➡ 14).
For your reference
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar
function to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link
Download from the TV
[Q]Link]
(When the TV is on)
Easy playback
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV
to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as
on the TV (➡ 20).
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to
HDMI input mode ([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode ([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView],
[PROG/CHECK] etc.
(When the TV is off)
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Power on link
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView],
[PROG/CHECK] etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs or USB memory.
Power off link
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is
automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback
or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when
recording, copying, finalising etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,
the receiver will also turn off.
Direct TV Recording
[Q]Link]
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
≥However this function does not work if you select the TV channels on this unit.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
The selected drive lights up on the unit’s display.
≥If you selected the DVD drive
Insert a disc. (➡ 26)
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
§1
§2
This button is available only when this unit is on.
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
[Note]
RQT9011
18
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
EH770EC.book 19 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Using the FUNCTION
MENU window to
operate this unit
[VIERA]Link]
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window using the TV remote control.
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV
remote control, and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
About the FUNCTION MENU
window (➡ 66).
Using the OPTION
menu window to
operate this unit
[VIERA]Link]
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (➡ below) and display the Top
Menu for DVD-Video.
1 Press [OPTION].
Control Panel
Control Panel is
displayed (➡ below).
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU
window is displayed
(➡ above).
Top Menu [DVD-V]
Top menu is displayed
(➡ 37).
Menu [DVD-V]
Menu is displayed
(➡ 37).
Drive Select
Select the HDD or DVD
drive
Rotate RIGHT
(JPEG)
Rotate the still picture
(➡ 43).
e,g.,
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
Menu
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
[Note]
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu
for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is
copying.
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control TM”/Q Link)
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.
Rotate LEFT
(JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG)
Zoom out (JPEG)
Using the Control
Panel
Enlarge or shrink the still
picture (➡ 43).
Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote
control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).
The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:
Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.
≥While playing still pictures
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit
the screen.
Control Panel
Pause
Search
Play
Exit
Search
Stop
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [Í DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➡ 70).
RQT9011
19
EH770EC.book 20 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
After set up is complete, TV aspect setting screen appears.
TV Aspect
DVD
Í DVD
TV
Í
16:9 WIDE TV
Í
16:9
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
4:3 TV
AV
Pan & Scan
Letterbox
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
SKIP
W X CH
SELECT
OK
RETURN
ShowView
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen
television.
≥Pan & Scan: When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (➡ 85).
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
CH
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
GUIDE
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
3,4,2,1
OK
≥Letterbox:
GUIDE
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(➡ 85).
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
OPTION
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
3
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
and press [OK].
When television type and aspect is set, the GUIDE Plus+
setting screen appears.
Auto-Setup
Do you want to setup
the GUIDE Plus+ system ?
Yes
1
2
Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the Q Link functions
(➡ 18), downloading from the television starts.
Download from TV
Pos
4
Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
No
SELECT
OK
RETURN
(The above message also appears in countries where GUIDE
Plus+ system is not available. However set up is not possible.)
≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Proceed to step 2 (➡ 21, GUIDE Plus+ system settings)
≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system or if
you live in a country where GUIDE Plus+ system is not
available (➡ 21, GUIDE Plus+ system)
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [OK].
Television picture appears. Set up is complete.
RETURN
You can download the tuning positions from the television.
This unit’s Auto Clock Setting function synchronizes the time
when the TV channel that is broadcasting time and date
information is tuned.
≥If the country setting screen appears on the television.
Country
België
Belgique
Belgien
Danmark
España
France
Italia
Nederland
SELECT
Norge
Portugal
Suomi
Sverige
Schweiz
Suisse
Svizzera
Others
OK
RETURN
RETURN: leave
OK: access
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[OK].
If you select “Schweiz”, “Suisse” or “Svizzera” in the Country
setting, or when the television tuning setting has been set to
Switzerland, the “Power Save” setting menu appears. Select
“On” or “Off” (➡ 71).
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 8 minutes.
RQT9011
20
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (➡ 73).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (➡ 71)
∫ To restart set up (➡ 72)
EH770EC.book 21 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
3
One of the following screens will appear
12.1. Wed 15:05
Landscape
12.1 Wed
Prog. Type
All Types
7th Heaven
15:05~16:05
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the following countries:
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/Luxembourg/
Netherlands/Spain/Switzerland
16:00
16:30
15:00
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR
Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
... 7th Heaven
Gilmore...
No Data
Abenteuerurlaub
-24 Hr
Aktuell
TIMER REC
RETURN
...
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
info
OPTION
GUIDE Display Mode
PAGE-
1
(As of end of June 2007)
≥This service may not be available in some areas in the above
countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.
15:30
Time:
PAGE+
If “No Data”
appears (➡ 22,
Editing
programme
lists,
Reference)
GUIDE Plus+ download is completed.
[Note]
You will need to complete Channel reception settings (➡ 20) to
setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not
set correctly.
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible
via the antenna input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE
Plus+ data via externally connected satellite receivers or digital
set-top boxes is not possible.
12.1. Wed 15:05
No Host Channel was detected.
Please refer to Operating Instructions.
Press OK to continue.
Visit following homepage for more information.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com
1
Setup
OK
RETURN
GUIDE Plus+ system is not available.
Check the host channel of your country.
(➡ 23, Host Channel)
Press [GUIDE].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Postal Code
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
Current Country: Switzerland
This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times
a day.
Clicking noise may be heard at that time.
Data download was unsuccessful.
Next download time slot will be at XX:XX.
Press OK to continue.
OK
0
~
9
OK
RETURN
RETURN
2
To download GUIDE Plus+ data, turn off your unit at the time
displayed on the screen or download the data manually from
“Data Download” in the Setup menu at that time.
(➡ 23, Changing the settings)
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons
to enter the Postal Code of your
location and press [OK].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
Yes
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings/GUIDE Plus+ system settings
Confirm the message on the screen.
The GUIDE Plus+ system provides programme information from
the host station displayed on the television like a TV programme
magazine. Setting up to record a broadcast is easy too. Simply
select the desired programme from the displayed list. You can
also search for desired programmes by displaying only the
programmes in a certain category.
1
GUIDE Plus+ system
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
No
Do you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system?
It may take time up to 2 hours.
≥For further information about operating the GUIDE Plus+
programme list, refer to “Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system”.
(➡ 31)
OK
RETURN
It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
[Note]
If your Postal Code changes, you can update this information later in
the Setup of the GUIDE Plus+ system (➡ 23, Changing the
settings).
≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [OK].
To download the GUIDE Plus+ data later
(➡ 22, GUIDE Plus+ data download)
RQT9011
21
EH770EC.book 22 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
Refer to the control reference on page 20.
Editing programme lists
GUIDE Plus+ data download
1
2
Press [GUIDE].
Press [OPTION].
12.1. Wed 15:05
There are 2 ways to download GUIDE Plus+ data.
–Download automatically when the unit is turned off.
–Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.
HDD REC PLAY
CH DC BS DUB EXT Link MPEG4
DVD REC PLAY
SD
PC
D.MIX
NET
Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
Time:
15:00
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
Download data automatically
≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit
is turned off.
During download, “GUIDE” appears in
the display of your unit.
Landscape
12.1 Wed
15:30
16:00
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
Yu-...
Gilmore...
Die Abschl... Freunde...
Setup S.O.S Style & ...
...
7th Heaven
Editor
OK
RETURN
3
DVD - AVCD
Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and
press [OK].
SP - + RWRAM
LP VR
EP SDPC
12.1. Wed 15:05
If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update is
interrupted.
Editor
Name
WDR
***04
***05
≥If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer
recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.
To ensure the GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded, you can disable
the timer recordings during data transmission. (➡ 23, left column,
Night Download)
Euros
ARD
ZDF
BBC1
***06
On/Off
Reference
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
TF1
TF6
FR6
ESPRT
ARD
---BBC1
ARTE
Source
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
1
OK
PAGE+
RETURN
4
Press [3, 4] to select the desired
“Name” and press [1].
You can also press [W X CH] to browse through the station
list.
Download data manually
At the data transmission time, you can download the data manually
from “Data Download” in the Setup menu (➡ 23).
16:30
Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
1
The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the
television station transmitting the television programme list) several
times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
On/Off
To select the stations to be displayed on the
programme list.
Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE
Plus+ list.
Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and
press [OK].
≥Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately
one day before you can display the television programme list.
≥The stations displayed in the television programme list are
determined according to geographical areas.
≥A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the
television programme list even if a signal can be received.
≥Once you have downloaded the programme list, reception of data
is required regularly to update and maintain the programme list.
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download.
≥During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating
sounds.
12.1. Wed 15:05
Landscape
12.1 Wed
Prog. Type
All Types
7th Heaven
15:05~16:05
15:30
16:00
16:30
Time:
15:00
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR
Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
... 7th Heaven
Gilmore...
No Data
Abenteuerurlaub
-24 Hr
RETURN
Aktuell
...
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
OPTION
GUIDE Display Mode
PAGE-
1
TIMER REC
PAGE+
1
[Note]
Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually
If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a
station, this station is either not supported by the
GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could
not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the
Reference field of this station). In this case, set the
appropriate Reference manually.
You can also manually assign the appropriate
Reference even if a station name was not recognized
(e.g. ***06).
Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the
appropriate station and press [OK].
[Note]
The station names in the Reference list can deviate
from the station list.
[Note]
RQT9011
22
Changes in the station list in the Setup menu (➡ 71) of your unit will
cause all Editor settings to return to the initial condition.
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Host Channel
Changing the settings
You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.
1
2
Press [GUIDE].
Press [OPTION].
12.1. Wed 15:05
List of Host Channel (As of end of June, 2007)
Landscape
12.1 Wed
Time:
15:00
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
15:30
It is not possible to receive GUIDE Plus+ data in all countries
(➡ below).
Check whether the right Host Channel has been input.
16:00
Country
Host Channel
Display of the Host
Channel
Switzerland§1
Eurosport
EUROS
France
Canal+§2
CANAL
Spain
Tele5
TELE5
Italy
MTV
MTV
Netherlands
Eurosport
EUROS
Belgium
RTL-TVI
RTLTV
Luxembourg§3
RTL-TVI
RTLTV
16:30
Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
Yu-...
Gilmore...
Die Abschl... Freunde...
Setup S.O.S Style & ...
...
7th Heaven
Editor
OK
RETURN
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
12.1. Wed 15:05
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
EH770EC.book 23 ページ
Setup
§1
Postal Code
XXXX
Host Channel
EUROS
Data Download
Night Download
On
German-speaking regions only
Analogue terrestrial broadcast only
§3 The Luxembourg line-up is available by setting up GUIDE Plus+
as country=Belgium with the postal code 9999 (➡ 21, step 2).
§2
≥To change the Host Channel manually ➡ left
OK
RETURN
4
Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [OK].
Postal
Code
To enter the Postal Code
The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive
regional data.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to
enter your Postal Code and press [OK].
Host
Channel
To change the Host Channel manually
The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred
via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is
recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the
system automatically.
[Note]
≥Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local
reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in
missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the desired station and
press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.
≥To check the host channels of your country
➡ right column, Host Channel
Data
To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually
Download Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The update can take approximately 2 hours.
≥For further informations ➡ 22, GUIDE Plus+ data
download
Night
To select the priority during midnight
Download The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM
every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete
data download.
If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a
timer recording overlap, you can select which will be
given priority.
On: Data Download
Timer recording does not start or is interrupted for
data download.
Off: Timer programming
GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded.
After recording finishes, we recommend you to
change this setting to “On”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or
Host Channel.
≥Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the
receipt of wrong or no data.
≥To change the settings, release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 33).
RQT9011
23
EH770EC.book 24 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Set up to match your television and remote control
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
Setup
SKIP
PAGE
Tuning
CH
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
5
PAUSE
EXIT
Setup
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
Disc
Picture
Sound
RETURN
Connection
Others
Display
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Off
Tuning
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
Progressive
On
CTION MENU
OPTION
RETURN
OK
EXIT
FU N
OK
Video
Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”
and press [OK].
PLAY/x1.3
GUIDE
16:9
Off
PAL
TAB
SELECT
Connection
Others
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
3,4,2,1
OK
TV Aspect
Progressive
TV System
HDMI Settings
AV1 Output
AV2 Settnigs
AV
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
TV operation
buttons
6
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
[OK].
Output becomes progressive.
[Note]
To enjoy progressive video
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (➡ 85).
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 70:00 SP
HDD
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off
“Progressive” if this occurs (➡ 45).
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
≥There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (➡ 70).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
Television operation
To Others
OK
RETURN
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
DVD
Í
Turn TV on/off
Input select
Setup
Manual Tuning
Auto-Setup Restart
Tuning
Download from TV
Í
CH
Volume
VOL
AV
Channel
Select
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
CH
ShowView
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
TAB
Connection
Others
DRIVE
SELECT
TV
SELECT
RETURN
1
Point the remote control at the television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
01:
[0] ➡ [1]
10:
[1] ➡ [0]
(continued on the next page)
RQT9011
24
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
(continued)
Manufacturer and Code No.
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
AKAI
BEJING
BEKO
Brand
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
NOBLEX
Code
05/28
05/19/20/47
24
36
33
BENQ
Code
01/02/03/04
35
27/30
33
05/71/72/73/
74
58/59
NOKIA
BP
BRANDT
BUSH
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
09
10/15
05
66
69
05
64/65
05
05
05
10/34
61
21
53
63/67
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
ORION
PEONY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
05
36
09
SANSUI
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
SEG
HIKONA
HITACHI
SELECO
SHARP
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JINGXING
52
05/22/23/40/
41
05
30
25
49
25/26/27/
60/61
10
45
30/39/70
05
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
37/38
52
05
05
10
26
32/42/43/
65/68
05
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
05/69/75/
76/77/78
05/25
18
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TCL
JVC
17/30/39/70
TELEFUNKEN
KDS
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
LOEWE
52
45
62
05/50/51
07/46
MAG
52
TEVION
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
YAMAHA
18/41
2
09
05
08
31/33/66/
67/69
10/11/12/
13/14
52
52
10/15/44
16/57
05
Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
[Note]
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
1
2
3
4
5
6
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Remote
Control” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press
[OK].
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Set up to match your television and remote control
EH770EC.book 25 ページ
Remote Control
Press “n” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
To change the code on the remote control
7
8
While pressing [OK], press and hold
the numbered button ([1], [2] or [3]) for
more than 5 seconds.
Press [OK].
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 7).
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 7).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9011
25
EH770EC.book 26 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Recording television programmes
3
2
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
REC
REC
DVD
Í
1
Numbered
buttons
3
TV
Í
PAGE
SKIP
∫
4
AV
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
CH
3
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
5
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
REC
CTION MENU
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
4
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and
turn it over.
≥[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (➡ 64).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
[USB]
≥It is not possible to record on a USB memory.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥[HDD] [RAM] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”
(➡ 68), you can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the
recording of audio.)
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
5
Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
FU N
OK
Remaining time
on the disc
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup
menu (➡ 69).
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
AUDIO
REC
PROG/CHECK
;
STOP
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
ShowView
GUIDE
3,4,2,1
OK
To select with the numbered buttons:
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
5
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
∫
OPEN/CLOSE
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalise them (➡ 64).
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up with the
Insert label-up.
arrow facing in.
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge
set to “PROTECT” (➡ 62, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it
automatically switches to the DVD drive when a disc is
inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
RQT9011
26
If a station broadcasts Teletext information
The unit automatically records the programme’s and station’s name
if the station’s Title Page is correctly set (➡ 72).
[Note]
The unit may take some time in retrieving titles (up to 30 minutes)
and may fail in some cases.
Quick Start (➡ 71)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, COMPONENT
VIDEO, VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals)
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE
button is pressed while the unit is off, the Electronic Program
Guide (EPG) displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)
≥“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.
≥Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may
take time to display the screen.
[Note]
Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVDRAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
EH770EC.book 27 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Recording modes and approximate recording times
DVD-RAM
Doublesided§1
(9.4 GB)
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
+RW
(4.7 GB)
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
175 hours
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
3 hours 35 min.
3 hours 35 min.
345 hours
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
7 hours 10 min.
7 hours 10 min.
710 hours
(530 hours§2)
8 hours
(6 hours§2)
16 hours
(12 hours§2)
8 hours
(6 hours§2)
14 hours 20 min.
(10 hours 45 min.§2)
710 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
for one side
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
HDD
(400 GB)
Singlesided
(4.7 GB)
XP (High picture quality
recording mode)
90 hours
SP (Standard recording
mode)
LP (Long recording mode)
Recording Mode
EP (Extra long recording
mode)§4
FR (Flexible Recording
Mode)§4
Approximately 9 hours
with video quality
equivalent to LP mode.
Recording television programmes
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
§1
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 68).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
§2
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
≥[HDD] You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
≥[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
≥[+R] [+RW] You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
REC
Disc Insertion/Ejection
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the disc now ?
Yes
When removing a recorded disc
No
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents of a disc—Format” (➡ 63)
∫ To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 64), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 64) or
“Disc Name” (➡ 62) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT9011
27
EH770EC.book 28 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Recording television programmes
Recording settings for High Speed
Copy
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
∫ 1 ¥ REC
DVD
TV
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons
Í
AV
[Note]
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
∫
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.
CH
PLAY/x1.3
1
EXIT
GUIDE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
OK
OPTION
TION MENU
3,4,2,1
OK
C
FUN
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
STATUS
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 30) or while using
Flexible Recording (➡ 29).
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT9011
28
When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set “Rec
for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 68)
However, some restrictions apply:
Refer to the “When recording a bilingual programme” and “About
the aspect when recording a programme” for more information
(➡ 8).
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
5
Flexible Recording
When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [OK].
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
[HDD]
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc
≥Recording starts.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS].
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
e.g., HDD
Remaining
time of
recording
HDD
REC 0:59
ARD
M1/M2
LR
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM]
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc
and the 30 minute balance will not
get recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.
XP
SP
LP
EP
Recording television programmes
EH770EC.book 29 ページ
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
Necessary space for recording
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
1
2
3
1
2
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
and press [OK].
Flexible Rec
Record in FR mode.
Maximum rec. time
Set rec. time
Start
4
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
8 Hour 00 Min.
8 Hour 00 Min.
Cancel
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.
Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
and press [OK].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
3 Press [∫].
To stop timer recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
3 Press [∫].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
[Note]
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
RQT9011
29
EH770EC.book 30 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Timer recording
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make
timer recordings
REC
X CH W ∫
OPEN/CLOSE
¥ REC
Before using the GUIDE Plus+ system
≥The television programme list is not displayed immediately after
purchasing this unit.
≥You must complete initial setup for the GUIDE Plus+ system.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons
DELETE ¢
∫
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system settings” (➡ 21) for more
information.
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
STOP
CH
W X CH
1
ShowView
Press [GUIDE].
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
15.7. Tue 15:05
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
OPTION
“Red”
“Green”
¥ REC
16:00
16:30
Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
...
Yu-...
Gilmore...
7th Heaven
Die Abschl... Freunde...
-24 Hr
S.O.S Style & ...
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
TIMER REC
RETURN
OPTION
15:30
15:00
Info
OPTION
GUIDE Display Mode
PAGE-
1
OK
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
3,4,2,1
OK
EXIT
Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
Time:
INPUT SELECT
;
EXIT
GUIDE
GUIDE
Landscape
15.7. Tue
SLOW/SEARCH
PAGE+
1
Í DVD
You can perform timer recordings by simply selecting the desired
programme from the television programme list.
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
“Blue”
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme.
3
Press [OK].
EXT LINK
REC MODE
Timer
Recording
Name
Remain
Date
Start
16:00
Stop
17:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
DVD 1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
HDD 30:24 SP
HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC
HDD SP OFF
Programme Name
The default setting
for Switzerland is
“ON”.
[Note]
≥The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system
may not be correct. It is recommended to modify the start
and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes. (➡ 32,
right column, step 3)
4
Press [OK].
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 26).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 73).
0
Gilmore girls
15:30
16:00
16:30
. Abenteuer... &Fliege-Die Talkshow
Timer icon
errick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space
20:00 HDD SP OFF OK
Programme
Check to make sure
“OK” is displayed
(➡ 33, Check, change or
delete a programme).
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
[Note]
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 73), the GUIDE
Plus+ system cannot be used.
RQT9011
30
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 33)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 33)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 33)
EH770EC.book 31 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system
Selecting the programme from the desired category
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and
Portrait view.
Landscape
15.7. Tue
Time:
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
16:30
1
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of main categories.
2
Press [3, 4] to select the desired
main category.
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
...
Yu-...
Gilmore...
7th Heaven
Die Abschl... Freunde...
S.O.S Style & ...
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
Info
OPTION
GUIDE Display Mode
PAGEPAGE+
1
RETURN
15.7. Tue 15:05
Portrait
Prog. Type
All Types
15.7 Tue
ARD ZDF RTL SAT1 RTL2 VOX PRO7
15:00~15:15
15:15~16:00
16:00~17:00
17:00~17:15
17:15~17:47
17:47~17:49
17:49~18:20
18:20~18:50
-24 Hr
RETURN
OK
RETURN
The sub menu for the selected main category appears.
Example: Press [3, 4] to select the main category Movies.
The sub category with several movie categories appears
(e.g. All Types, Action, Animation, Comedy, Drama,
Romance, Sci Fi, Thriller, Adventure).
Tagesschau um fünf
Brisant
Tagesschau
Verbotene Liebe
Marienhof
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
OPTION
GUIDE Display Mode
Portrait
Prog. Type
All Types
15.7 Tue
All Types
ARD ZDF RTL SAT1 RTL2 VOX
PRO7
All
Movies
15:00~15:15 Tagesschau
Action
Sport
Wildnis Children
15:15~16:00 Abenteuer
Animation
Comedy
Talkshow Other
16:00~17:00 Fliege-Die
Drama
17:00~17:15 Tagesschau um fünf
Romance
17:15~17:47 Brisant
Sci Fi
17:47~17:49 Tagesschau
Thriller
Adventure
17:49~18:20 Verbotene
Liebe
18:20~18:50 Marienhof
Prog. Type
Tagesschau
Abenteuer Wildnis
Fliege-Die Talkshow
PAGEPAGE+
1
TIMER REC
To change stations
16:00
Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
TIMER REC
15.7. Tue 15:05
15:30
15:00
-24 Hr
Portrait view
Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
1
15.7. Tue 15:05
1
Landscape view
The Programme Type function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list
sorted by main category (e.g. Movies, Sport). Each main category
will contain individual sub categories. The GUIDE Plus+ list for the
selected main category only appears in the Portrait view.
Timer recording
Basic operations
Landscape view
1 Press [2] until the station list is
highlighted.
2 Press [3, 4] to select a station.
3 ≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
Press the “Red” button.
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
Press [OK].
3
Press [2] to go to the sub category
menu.
4
5
Press [3, 4] to make your selection.
Press [OK].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Portrait
Prog. Type
Movies
Action
ARD ZDF RTL SAT1 RTL2 VOX PRO7
(e.g., Action)
12. 1. Wed: 20:00~21:30 The fast and the fury
21:30~23:00 Ronin
23:00~01:15 Noch 60 Sekunden
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Landscape
view.
13. 1. Thu: 19:15~21:00
Der Sturm
21:00~22:30 Speed 2
14. 1. Fri: 22:30~23:00 Mission Impossible
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Portrait
view.
To view a
programme for
another day
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date.
23:00~01:30 Volcano
Info
RETURN
OPTION
PAGEPAGE+
1
Prog. Type
TIMER REC
1
Portrait view
1 Press [3] until the station list is
highlighted.
2 Press [2, 1] to select a station.
3 ≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
Press the “Red” button.
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
Press [OK].
A list appears with all programmes of the selected main
category and the selected sub category.
6
Press [3, 4] to go through the GUIDE
Plus+ list.
If you want to change the station, press [3] until the station
list is highlighted and then press [2, 1].
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for the selected categories for
this station.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To navigate within
Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
the GUIDE Plus+ list. Only current and future programmes are
shown.
To browse through
Press [W X CH].
the GUIDE Plus+ list.
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
symbol)
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time, short
description) is available for these
programmes.
Press [ ] to show and hide the
information.
RQT9011
31
EH770EC.book 32 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 30.
Manually programming timer
recordings
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings
Entering SHOWVIEW numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.
1
1
Timer
Recording
Press [ShowView].
ShowView
Record
Remain
No. Name
& 01
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
2
Press the numbered buttons to enter
the SHOWVIEW number.
3
HDD 30:24 SP
Start
DVD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space
OK
Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [OK].
Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].
Press [OK].
Timer
Recording
Name
Remain
Name
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
Date
Start
16:00
Stop
17:00
Date
Start
22:00
Stop
22:30
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
≥Date
[. Date:
Current date up to one month later minus
l ;:
one day
l Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
l ;:
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 34, Relief Recording).
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥VPS/PDC (➡ 34)
ON!)OFF (– – –)
If the broadcasting station is not transmitting VPS/PDC
signals, “jjj” appears in the menu for timer programming
under “VPS/PDC”.
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 34)
ON!)OFF
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].
(➡ 65, Entering text)
Programme Name
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
No. Name
& 01
ARD
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space
20:00 HDD SP OFF OK
Programme
HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC
HDD SP
OFF
Programme Name
HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC
HDD SP OFF
Timer icon
DVD 1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
4
Date
ARD 15. 7. TUE 19:00 20:00 HDD SP OFF
New Timer Programme
Timer
Recording
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
3
Remain
12:53:00 15. 7. TUE
Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press OK.
2
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 33).
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
4
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
No. Name
∫ To set timer programme when VPS/PDC is “ON”
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “VPS/PDC” and press [3, 4] to
select “ON” in step 3 (➡ above).
If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two
SHOWVIEW numbers, use the SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC.
ARD
ZDF
12.10 Lizzie McGuire 1-104-525
12.30 Dunya & Desie (15) 1-902
(VPS 12.35 = 858-728)
13.00 World News
34-273
VPS/PDC numbers
[Note]
VPS/PDC will activate when this unit is set to standby mode. While
this unit is on, recording starts and finishes at times you set initially.
Timer icon
32
∫ To release the unit from recording standby (➡ 33)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 33)
ARD
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space
20:00 HDD SP OFF OK
Programme
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 33).
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already begun (➡ 33)
RQT9011
& 01
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
1
Stop Recording
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
Stop Recording
Cancel
OK
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Icons
F
[
W
Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
F
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
X
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 34).
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
l
SELECT
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
Recording” and press [OK].
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
To release the unit from recording
standby
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1
2
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
While the unit is on
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].
2
Check, change or delete a programme
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.
Timer
Recording
Notes on timer recording
≥When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a
different TV system cannot be played unless the TV system is
changed in the Setup menu (➡ 73) or the timer recording has
completed or has been cancelled.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 53).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
Programme
Remain
No. Name
Date
HDD 30:24 SP
Start
DVD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS Drive
HDD
Stop DVD Mode PDC space
New Timer Programme
≥The timer icon “F” (➡ right) disappears from the timer
recording list.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (➡ right) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
Programme
Timer recording
EH770EC.book 33 ページ
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
RETURN
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 32,
right column, step 3)
Not recorded
∫ To delete a programme
Recorded
Recorded
≥(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It
takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. If you
want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off” (➡ 23).
≥If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap
[regardless of whether they are VPS/PDC (➡ 34) controlled], the
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has
finished.
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9011
33
EH770EC.book 34 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 30.
Relief Recording
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were reliefrecorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 37).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
≥Relief recording is not activated when recording the programme
with VPS/PDC and it is extended so that it no longer fits on the
disc.
Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
1
2
3
4
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
Timer
Recording
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Name
Date
Start
Stop
1 ARD
SUN
22:00
22:30
HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC RENEW
ON
HDD SP OFF
Programme Name
[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
VPS/PDC function
VPS (Video Programme System) or PDC (Programme Delivery Control) is a very convenient system which records exactly from beginning to end
of the TV programmes set in timer recording, even if the actual broadcasting time differs from the scheduled time due to delayed start or extension
of the programme duration. Also, if a programme is interrupted, for example, some special news is inserted, the recording will be paused
automatically and resumed when the programme continues.
When VPS/PDC recording
≥Use VPS/PDC time for recording the TV programmes.
≥If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two SHOWVIEW numbers, use the
SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC.
≥VPS/PDC will activate when in this unit is set to standby mode. While this unit is on, recording
starts and finishes at times you set initially.
≥Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when recording time is not VPS/PDC time.
≥VPS/PDC recording is not performed when VPS/PDC time is incorrect, even if only by one
minute. To find out VPS/PDC time, consult Teletext, a newspaper or magazine, or other source.
≥If you made a timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the default setting for Switzerland
is “ON”.
To change “VPS/PDC” setting (➡ 32, right column, step 3)
When the VPS/PDC signal drops out
because the broadcast signal is weak.
When a TV station does not transmit a
regular VPS/PDC signal.
Depending on the signals sent from the TV stations, the VPS/PDC system may not work properly
even when “VPS/PDC” has been set to “ON”.
Timer recording will be performed in the normal mode (without VPS/PDC) even if it was
programmed for VPS/PDC.
In this case, even if the timer recording is performed, the programmed timer recording will not be
cancelled at that particular time but at 4 a.m. two days later.
If the start times of scheduled
programmes listed in the newspaper or
magazine change at a later date.
Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when programming a programme whose start time has been
subsequently changed.
[Note]
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some cases.
RQT9011
34
EH770EC.book 35 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Recording broadcasts from external equipment
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Making timer recordings on the
television
To record programmes from digital/satellite receiver using timer
programming
(e.g., of digital broadcasts)
Preparation
≥Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the
Scart terminal of a VCR or a digital/satellite receiver with a 21-pin
Scart cable (➡ 15).
≥Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 70).
≥Set “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 70).
To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a
television with a Q Link function (➡ 18) that you can use for setting
timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 14).
1
2
Make timer programming on the TV.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 26).
3
1
Turn off this unit.
The start and end of recording is controlled by the TV.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥When this unit is in timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby
(“F” or “EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s display), recording from
television does not start.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 47).
2
Make timer programming on the
external equipment.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 26).
3
Press [EXT LINK].
The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to
indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer
recording standby.
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel the setting after recording is finished.
[Note]
Recording from digital/satellite receiver
or decoder
Preparation
≥Connect a digital/satellite receiver or decoder to this unit’s input
terminals (➡ 15).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 73).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
Timer recording/Recording broadcasts from external equipment
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (digital/satellite receiver) —
EXT LINK
≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
≥When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
≥When “AV2 Connection” is set to “Decoder”, EXT LINK is not
available (➡ 70).
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 47).
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), The GUIDE Plus+ data cannot downloaded.
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, video
picture is from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output”
setting (➡ 70).
≥During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only
available from the drive performing the recording.
e.g.,If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select “A2”.
2
3
4
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
Select the channel on the other
equipment.
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT9011
35
EH770EC.book 36 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
3
2
REC
DVD
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
1
∫
TV
Í
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
DivX
DivX Menu screen appears (➡ 40).
≥When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 62), play automatically starts when
inserted in the unit.
OPEN/CLOSE
3
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
SKIP
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—
Direct Navigator
CH
ShowView
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(This function does not work with finalised discs.)
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
6, 5
∫
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR,
“Top Menu”
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Thumbnail Display
3
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
OK
007
OPTION
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥It is possible to watch playback from one drive while
recording on another (editing is not possible).
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up with the
Insert label-up.
arrow facing in.
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function (➡ 26)
When a music CD is inserted, the menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select
CD
“Play Music” and press
Play Music
[OK].
Copy Music
Play starts.
OK
RETURN
Rec time
0:52(SP)
---
Page 02/02
Select
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---
Next
Previous
Title View
HDD
Name
ARD
ZDF
AV2
ARD
AV2
ZDF
ARD
ARD
VIDEO
PICTURE
Date Day Time Name of title
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
OK
Next
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
1 Press [OPTION] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [OK].
≥The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is
turned off.
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CHAPTER
TIME SLIP
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
36
ARD 11.10. SAT
---
Previous
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
AUDIO
SELECT
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
2;, ;1
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to “PICTURE”
Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will be cancelled.
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours
or longer)” recording mode.
≥If you recorded to a +R or +RW.
≥If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the
Setup menu (➡ 68).
However, if you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for
High Speed Copy” was set to “Off” in the Setup menu (➡ 68), the
aspect will remain 16:9.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
RQT9011
≥Table Display
PICTURE
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
2
ARD 10.10. FRI
RETURN
OPTION
VIDEO
---
008
---
OK
OPTION
“Red”
Title View
HDD
;
GUIDE
3,4,2,1
OK
1
Press [1] (PLAY).
2
[HDD] [RAM]
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Title View
VIDEO
HDD
007
008
PICTURE
---
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[OK].
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
115:
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK]. (Thumbnail Display only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
Direct Navigator screen icons
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
t
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 34, Relief Recording)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 84, CPRM)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 73).
[DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
If “ENTER” appears on the screen, press [OK].
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
You can also return to the menu screen with the following
steps.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press
[OK].
[VCD] Press [RETURN].
[Note]
≥When recording while the “TV System” is set to “PAL”, discs recorded in NTSC format cannot be played. To play, change the “TV System” to
“NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 73).
≥It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 73).
Operations during play
Stop
Press [∫].
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
EH770EC.book 37 ページ
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is cleared in some cases.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Pause
Press [;].
Search
Press [6] or [5].
Skip
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
[CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning of the title currently playing.
Starting from a
selected title
Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
≥[HDD]
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥MP3 and JPEG
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥This works only when stopped (➡ right, Screen saver is displayed on the television)
with some discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is
displayed on the television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the
unit’s display.)
Quick View
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
[HDD] [RAM]
Play speed is quicker than normal.
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
≥Depending on the disc, some operations may not be possible.
(Continued on the next page)
RQT9011
37
EH770EC.book 38 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to the control reference on page 36.
Operations during play
(continued)
Slow-motion
While paused, press [6] or [5].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).
Frame-by-frame
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(This function does not work with
finalised discs.)
-5 min
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute
intervals.)
Manual Skip
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(This function does not work with
finalised discs.)
Each time you press, skip approx. 30 seconds forward.
Create Chapter
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
(➡ 46, Title/Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.
≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby.
This automatically
disappears after
approximately 5
seconds. To show the
screen again press
[TIME SLIP] again.
≥Depending on the disc, some operations may not be possible.
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
^---------------}
HDD
PLAY
LR
[DVD-V]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 44, Soundtrack).
Soundtrack
e.g., “L R” is selected
1 ENG
§Digital 3/2.1ch
e.g., English is selected.
[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 69).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting is “On” ➡ 68).
RQT9011
38
EH770EC.book 39 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Playing DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
DivX
Playable
discs
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
File
format
DivX
≥Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number
of folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
(including the root folder)
Number
of files
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files
Support
version
Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with
standard playback of DivX media files.
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
Video
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.
MP3
Playable
discs and
USB
memory
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
File
format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Number
of folders
(groups)
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
300 folders (groups)
(including the root folder)
Number
of files
(tracks)
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1:
3000 files (tracks)
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tags
not compatible
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§4 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
Root
001
001 (folder=group)
001track.mp3 (file=track)
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
002 group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Order of play
Structure of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
001
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
003 Folder
Still pictures (JPEG§2)
Playable
discs and
USB
memory
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
File
format
JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Number
of pixels
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number
of
folders§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders
recognizable: 300 folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300
folders (including higher folders)
Number
of files§3
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Total number of recognizable file including MP3,
JPEG, DivX and other types of files is 4000.
[USB] Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG and
other types of files is 3000.
§2
It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
§3
When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
§1
004 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Order of play
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files
recognizable§1: 3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000
files
002 Folder
[RAM]
The following
¢¢¢: Numbers
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs/Playing DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
can be displayed on this unit.
XXX: Letters
§1
The folder cannot be
displayed if the numbers
are all “0” (e.g.,
DCIM000, etc.).
§2 Folders can be created
on other equipment.
However, these folders
cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file
name has been input
using other equipment,
the name may not be
displayed properly or you
may not be able to play or
edit the data.
Root
JPEG
DCIM¢¢¢
§1 (Higher folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX
(Picture
folder)
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
§2
DCIM
¢¢¢XXXXX
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
RQT9011
39
EH770EC.book 40 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Playing DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
Playing DivX discs
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
You can play DVD-R, DVD-R DL and CD-R/CD-RW discs which
contain DivX video contents that have been recorded on a computer.
DVD
TV
Í
DRIVE SELECT
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
CH
1
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
SLOW/SEARCH
∫
Folder1 : 00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
:, 9
001
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
Tree
Name of Title
No.
ABC.avi
1
EXIT
EXIT
OPTION
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Total Title : 001
RETURN
≥Files are treated as titles.
≥When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”
in step 4 to change the playback mode.
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
001/001
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
OPTION
STATUS
OK
CTION MENU
3,4,2,1
OK
Page
FU N
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
“Green”
2
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Selecting file type to play
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG).
To stop playing
Press [∫].
e.g.,
Play mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of file,
select the file type
from ''Playback'' in FUNCTION MENU.
≥When playing the file displayed on the screen
Press [OK].
≥When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the
screen
Follow the steps below.
To select file type
1 Press [RETURN].
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[Note]
≥You cannot play DivX while recording or copying.
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
Using the tree screen to find a folder
FUNCTION MENU
Play Mode : DivX
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Playback
Recording
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press
[OK].
1
While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
F 1/21
12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
DATA2
Playback
Select file type.
DivX
MP3
Folder
OK
RETURN
JPEG
4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press
[OK].
If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right
column.
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “To play MP3 files on the disc” step 2
on page 41.
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “To play still pictures on the disc”
step 4 on page 42
RQT9011
40
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
2
Regarding DivX VOD content
Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
information about DivX VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 71, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
Setup
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DivX Registration
DivX (R) Video On Demand
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
8 alphanumeric
characters
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
To play MP3 files on the USB memory
[USB]
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory (➡ 13).
OK
RETURN
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired” is displayed.)
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
–you press [Í DVD].
–you press [∫].
–you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
–timer recording starts on the HDD.
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
The menu is automatically displayed.
USB device
Play MP3
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
RETURN
OK
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Play MP3” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
3
Playing DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
EH770EC.book 41 ページ
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
You can also operate with the following steps
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
➡ Go to step 2 (➡ above)
Operations during play (➡ 37)
“Stop”, “Pause”, “Search” are possible.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Playing MP3 files
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto DVD-R, DVDR DL, CD-R/CD-RW discs and USB memory.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Play stops.
[Note]
To play MP3 files on the disc
You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or
copying.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Using the tree screen to find a group
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1
1
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Selected group
G: Group No.
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
MP3 Menu
CD
G
1
T
1
TOTAL
1/111
Number
0 – 9
Prev.
Next
SELECT
OK
RETURN
No.
Group
1 : My favorite
Tree
Total
Track
001 Both Ends Freezing
1
002 Lady Starfish
2
003 Life on Jupiter
3
004 Metal Glue
4
005 Paint It Yellow
5
006 Pyjamamama
6
007 Shrimps from Mars
7
008 Starperson
8
009 Velvet Cuppermine
9
010 Ziggy Starfish
10
Page 001/024
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
≥When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in
“To select file type” on page 40 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change
the playback mode.
While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
MP3 Menu
CD
G
8
T
14
TOTAL
40/111
Number
0 – 9
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Tree
MP3 music
G 7/25
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
Selected group No. /Total
groups contain MP3 files
If the group has no track, “– –”
is displayed as group number.
You cannot select groups
that contain no compatible
files.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[OK].
The file list for the group appears.
RQT9011
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
41
EH770EC.book 42 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Playing DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
Refer to the control reference on page 40.
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
Playing still pictures
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥You can playback still pictures recorded with a computer onto DVDR, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 43)
To play still pictures on the disc
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1
2
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN].
The indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[HDD] [RAM]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
001
VIDEO
---
---
---
Page 01/01
Previous
OK
Recording date of the
first picture in the album/
number of pictures/
album name.
1. 2. 06 Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006
Slide Show
OPTION
RETURN
To play still pictures on the USB memory
Album View screen
---
002
1. 1. 06 Total 5
Date: 1. 1.2006
PICTURE
[USB]
1
Insert the USB memory (➡ 13).
The menu is automatically displayed.
Next
Press OK to show
pictures.
USB device
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
[HDD] [RAM] If “VIDEO” is selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Picture (JPEG) View
Folder
103__DVD
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
----
----
----
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
RETURN
(➡ Go to step 4)
When the DivX or MP3 Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4
in “To select file type” on page 40 selecting “JPEG” in step 4 to
change the playback mode.
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 43)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
Album Name
PICTURE
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
----
----
----
Previous
OK
RETURN
e.g., HDD
103__DVD
0001
Page 001/001
OPTION
Next
Select
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
RQT9011
42
Play MP3
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
OK
2
3
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Pictures
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
OK
3
While stopped
≥Press [2, 1] to select the previous or next album.
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 43)
You can also operate with the following steps
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
➡ Go to step 2 (➡ above)
To return to the Picture (JPEG) View screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
EH770EC.book 43 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Start Slide
Show
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Slide Show
Setting
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM]
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].
≥To change the display interval
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].
≥Repeat Play
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
Rotate
1
While playing
Rotate RIGHT
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
Rotate LEFT
OK
RETURN
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
Zoom in
Zoom out
1
While playing
Rotate RIGHT
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
OK
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK].
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.
Properties
Playing DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
Useful functions during still picture play
While playing
e.g., HDD
Press [STATUS] twice.
RETURN
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1. 1. 2005
No.
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS].
3/9
Shooting date
∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
[RAM] (➡ 39, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
To switch to another higher folder
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [OK].
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
Folder
F 1/3
0002
0003
0004
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
021216_0026
103_DVD
Select Folder
Select folder to access.
Folder
103__DVD
0001
104_DVD
105_DVD
\DCIM
Press OK to set.
SELECT
OK
Previous
RETURN
Page 001/001
Next
OK
OK
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [OK].
RQT9011
43
EH770EC.book 44 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Using on-screen menus/Status message
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
DVD
Soundtrack§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V]
Select the audio and language (➡ below, Audio attribute,
Language).
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
CH
Subtitle§
[DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ below,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
GUIDE
OK
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
STATUS
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
3,4,2,1
OK
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Angle§ [DVD-V]
DISPLAY
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
(➡ 38, Changing audio during play)
Source Select (DivX)
≥Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using interlace.
≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.
Using on-screen menus
Common procedures
1
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Other
Menu
Soundtrack
PBC (Playback control) (➡ 85) [VCD]
1
Subtitle
Off
Audio channel
LR
Item
Setting
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
RQT9011
44
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
§Digital 2/0 ch
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the
menus (➡ 37) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
Audio attribute
LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Repeat Play
≥All
≥Chapter
[CD] [VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
MP3 (excluding [USB])
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [VCD] and MP3 (excluding [USB])
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
≥Track
Select “Off” to cancel.
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Playback NR
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
V.S.S.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround
function on the connected equipment.)
≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.
Dialog Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Other menu—Change the display position
Position
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive§ (➡ 85)
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu
moves.
Using on-screen menus/Status message
EH770EC.book 45 ページ
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 84, Film and video).
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration to the right, then select
“Auto”.
When the output signal is NTSC
≥Auto1
(normal):
≥Auto2:
≥Video:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
≥Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
a video tape.
≥On:
Noise reduction works for input video.
≥Off:
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input
signal as it is.
§
Status messages
Press [STATUS].
The display changes each time you press the button.
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory
The remaining time appears here while
stopped.
Recording or play status/input channel
TV audio type being received (➡ below)
Selected audio type
HDD
REC
PLAY
STEREO
LR
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
DVD REC
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
Date and time
vRemain
18:53:50 11.10.
v T1
0:05.14 XP
v T2
13:50 XP
0:00.10 XP
Title number and elapsed time during
recording/Recording mode
No display
≥TV audio type
STEREO: STEREO stereo broadcast
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast
M 1: Monaural broadcast
Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 24).
RQT9011
45
EH770EC.book 46 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Editing titles/chapters
TV
Í
Í
1
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
STOP
[HDD] [RAM]
3
Press the “Red” button to select
“VIDEO”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
2
ShowView
:, 9
PLAY/x1.3
During play or while stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
PAGE
;
1
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
007
VIDEO
PICTURE
Title View screen
---
008
EXIT
GUIDE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
OK
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10. SAT
---
---
CTION MENU
3,4,2,1
OK
FU N
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Previous
OK
OPTION
RETURN
OPTION
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
RETURN
RETURN
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]AUDIO
[+R]STATUS
[+R]DL]
[+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
DISPLAY TIME
SLIP
(You cannot edit finalised discs.)
Title/Chapter
4
5
Chapter
Start
Page 02/02
OPTION
Select
Next
Previous
End
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK]. (➡ 47)
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 38, 47, Create Chapter)
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Enter Name
Set up Protection
Chapter
Chapter
Cancel Protection
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (➡ 48).
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
–Titles:
500
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–Titles:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
–Chapters:
Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 62).
46
Delete
Partial Delete
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Edit
Divide Title
Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 47).
Chapter View
Table Display
Album View
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance (➡ 36)
Playing still pictures (➡ 42, To play still
pictures on the disc, step 3)
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
[Note]
RQT9011
Next
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
MANUAL SKIP
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
Title
---
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
HDD
VIDEO
Chapter View screen
008 ARD 11.10. SAT
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:31.24
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
7
Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 47).
Title View
≥You can go back to Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
EH770EC.book 47 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Title operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ 46)
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
Properties
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Enter Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
Properties
Dinosaur
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD
You can give names to recorded titles.
(➡ 65, Entering text)
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Editing titles/chapters
Delete§
Title V
007
008
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
008
VIDEO
PLAY
Start
End
Next
Finish
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.
0:43.21
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(➡ below, For your reference)
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at
the point you want to change.
VIDEO
008
Change
Finish
0:00.00
Change
- -:- -.- -
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
ENTER
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
You can divide a title into two.
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Divide Title
008
VIDEO
PLAY
Preview
Divide
Finish
0:43.21
To confirm the division point
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the
title.
Divide
- -:- -.- -
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 84) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ 46)
Delete Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
Create Chapter
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
§
Combine Chapters
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
008
Create Chapter
VIDEO
PLAY
Create
Finish
0:43.21
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use search (➡ 37), Time Slip (➡ 38) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 38) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 38).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT9011
47
EH770EC.book 48 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Creating, editing and playing playlists
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [OK].
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
Playlists
HDD
Playlist View
--
STOP
PAUSE
--
--
--
--
PLAY/x1.3
Create
--
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OPTION
OPTION
FUNCTION
MENU
5
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Create
Playlists
HDD
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
You can arrange the chapters (➡ 46) to create a playlist.
AUDIO STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Title
Title
Chapter
Press [2, 1] to select the source title
and press [4].
≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to
step 7.
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
CTION MENU
3,4,2,1
OK
FU N
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
Chapter
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
Page 001/001
002
Chapters in Playlist
-----
OK
RETURN
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
6
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
OK
RETURN
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
OPTION
Page 001/001
Press RETURN to finish.
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]
(➡ 47, Create Chapter).
7
Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
Chapters in Playlist
-----
OK
RETURN
Page 001/001
Press RETURN to finish.
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8
Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
1
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
To Others
ShowView Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
HDD Management
OK
RETURN
48
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
Chapters in Playlist
-----
Creating playlists
RQT9011
Press RETURN to finish.
Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
[OK].
Playlists
HDD
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 62).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 73).
OPTION
Page 001/001
Press [3] to cancel.
Copying (➡ 53) a playlist will create a title.
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
–Playlists:
99
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
Page 001/001
Music Server
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
EH770EC.book 49 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Playlist operations
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
1
2
3
4
Delete§
[HDD] [RAM]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist.
Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
Properties
No.
10
Chapters 002
01
--
12.10. SUN 0:30
Create
--
--
Create
RETURN
(➡ 48, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)
[HDD] [RAM]
--
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[OK].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Enter
Name
You can give names to playlists.
(➡ 65, Entering text)
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy§
--
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 46)
5
Date 12.10.2006 TUE
Total 0:30.53
OK
Playlist View screen
Playlist View
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
Dinosaur
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
Playlists
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
Change
Thumbnail
Create
Copy
Delete
Enter Name
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
Creating, editing and playing playlists
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
(➡ 47, Change Thumbnail)
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Edit
Chapter operations
Chapter View
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
Playlists
HDD
Chapter View screen
Chapter View
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
001
002
---
Add
Chapter
(➡ 48, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)
Move
Chapter
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
---
Move Chapter
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
0:19.36
0:10.24
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
001
002
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 46)
7
Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Page 01/01
Next
OK
RETURN
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
---
---
Previous
Add Chapter
Move Chapter
--0:19.36
0:10.24
§
Create
Chapter
(➡ 47, Create Chapter)
Combine
Chapters
(➡ 47, Combine Chapters)
Delete
Chapter§
(➡ 47, Delete Chapter)
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
Multiple editing is possible.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9011
49
EH770EC.book 50 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Editing still pictures
1
2
DVD
3
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [OPTION] without selecting album.
CH
ShowView
Editing a still picture:
PROG/CHECK
1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [OK].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
STOP
PAUSE
Editing an album:
Select the album to be edited and press
[OPTION].
AV
DRIVE SELECT
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press the “Green” button to select
“PICTURE”.
PLAY/x1.3
;
EXIT
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
FU N
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
3,4,2,1
OK
OPTION
“Green”
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 43)
4
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
∫To edit the album
(e.g., [RAM])
Slide Show Setting
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 43)
Add Pictures
Enter Album Name
Create Album
Edit Album
Delete Album
Copy to HDD
Cancel Protection
Start Slide Show
[HDD] [RAM]
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CDR/CD-RW and USB memory.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 62, Setting the protection).
Set up Protection
Select Folder
Title View
Album and picture operation (➡ 51)
Playing title [➡ 36, Selecting recorded programmes
(titles) to play—Direct Navigator, step 3]
[RAM]
This is only displayed when there are other higher
folders that can be viewed.
To switch to another higher folder (➡ 43)
∫To edit still picture
(e.g., [RAM])
Delete Picture
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Album View
Album and picture operation
(➡ 51)
You can go back to Album View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9011
50
EH770EC.book 51 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Album and picture operation
Delete Picture§
Delete Album§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Enter Album Name
You can give names to albums.
(➡ 65, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album
may be deleted by another unit.
Add Pictures
Create Album
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pic
Editing still pictures
After performing steps 1–4, page 50
HDD
Album Name
103__
0001
0002
0005
0006
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [OK].
e.g.,
4
3
2
Step 1
Please select album to copy.
Create Album
HDD
007
---
008
12. 5.06 Total 24
100_DVD
---
12. 6.06 Total 3
101_DVD
---
Previous
---
Page 02/02
OK
Next
Previous
RETURN
Next
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture you want
to add and press [OK].
e.g.,
Create Album
Which pictures to copy from the selected album?
Select pictures to copy
Copy all pictures
SELECT
OK
RETURN
[RAM]
To switch to another higher folder
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Select Folder” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and press [OK].
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
Only for “Create Album”
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 65, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording
date information, the date will appear as [--.--.----].)
Copy to DVD-RAM
Press [2] to select “Start” and press [OK].
[HDD]
You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
§
Multiple editing is possible.
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.
RQT9011
51
EH770EC.book 52 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Delete Navigator
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
DVD
TV
Í
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
DELETE ¢
1
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
SKIP
CH
ShowView
DELETE Navigator
007
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
;
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
CTION MENU
OPTION
“Green”
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
---
Page 02/02
OPTION
PICTURE
Select
Next
Previous
Next
[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
3
MANUAL SKIP
REC
ARD 11.10. SAT
---
Previous
FU N
OK
ARD 10.10. FRI
RETURN
EXIT
GUIDE
“Red”
VIDEO
---
008
---
OK
EXIT
3,4,2,1
OK
Title View
HDD
PROG/CHECK
If you want to delete a title:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [OK].
If you want to delete an album:
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [DELETE ¢].
≥A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
If you want to delete a still picture:
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to
delete and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 62, Setting the protection).
∫ Available disc space after deleting
You can confirm the titles or pictures etc. that you have
selected using the option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 46,
step 5).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 50,
step 4).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)
View” (➡ 50, step 4).
≥[HDD] [RAM] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture), the
space deleted becomes available for recording.
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles or still
pictures
Title
Title
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Available disc space
increases after deleting
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple deleting
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
4
Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
The title, album or the picture is deleted.
Title
Title
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
Deleting titles or pictures during play
1
While playing
Press [DELETE ¢].
You cannot delete a picture during a Slide Show.
2
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The title or the picture is deleted.
RQT9011
52
EH770EC.book 53 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Copy
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult
settings.
Features
Copy direction
HDD ➝ DVD
≤
DVD ➝ HDD
–
≤
High speed mode copy§1
Changing recording mode
Finalise
§3
Copying playlists§4
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
§1
–
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalised
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
–
–
≤
–§5
≤
–§6
–
–
Advanced Copy
Make a copy list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
way you want.
≤
≤
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
≤
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with
finalised discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
≤§2
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
≤
≤
≤
–§5
≤§7
–§6
–
≤§8
To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 68).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with
high-speed copy.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.
Delete Navigator/Copying titles or playlists
Copying titles or playlists
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed
)
If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (➡ 64).
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.)
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 8).
–Still pictures cannot be played.
§2
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
12X Speed
5X Speed
4X Speed
HDD
DVD-R DL§2
DVD-RAM
DVD-R§1
Required
Required
Required
Recording
Recorded
Speed
Speed
Speed
Mode
time
time
time
XP
12
min.
5x
5
min.
46
s.
10x
15
min.
4x
1
SP
6 min.
10x 2 min. 30 s. 24x 7 min. 30 s. 8x
1 hour
LP
3 min.
20x 1 min. 21 s. 44x 3 min. 45 s. 16x
EP (6H)
2 min.
30x
58 sec. 62x 2 min. 30 s. 24x
EP (8H)
1 min. 30 s. 40x
48 sec. 75x 1 min. 53 s. 32x
4X Speed
DVD-RW§3
Required
Speed
time
15 min.
4x
7 min. 30 s. 8x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
2 min. 30 s. 24x
1 min. 57 s. 31x
8X Speed
4X Speed
4X Speed
+R DL§2
+RW
+R§4
Required
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
time
time
time
8 min. 20 s. 7x
15 min.
4x
15 min.
4x
3 min. 45 s. 16x 7 min. 30 s. 8x 7 min. 30 s. 8x
1 min. 53 s. 32x 3 min. 45 s. 16x 3 min. 45 s. 16x
≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided)
and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 5)
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 84) compatible DVDRAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 47).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”
titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.
RQT9011
53
EH770EC.book 54 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Copying titles orTVplaylists
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
∫
1
CH
;
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
COPY Navigator
HDD
Total : 0
1
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---
EXIT
Rec time
0:52(SP)
FU N
OK
OPTION
OPTION
“Red”
CTION MENU
3,4,2,1
OK
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
3
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [OK].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
STATUS
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Before copying
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 68) when:
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 69)
and you are copying in XP mode.
4
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R and +R DL discs, they become playonly and you can no longer record or edit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following table.
Copy speed
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §
High speed
∫ To stop copying (➡ 56)
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
§
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
functions (➡ 56)
Normal speed
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” do not match.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
[Note]
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot
be copied.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 4, 5).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Copy
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalised (➡ 84). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,
copy will not be performed.)
54
Copy starts.
Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 68)
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
RQT9011
Select
OPTION
RETURN
“Green”
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size:
0MB( 0%)
Date Day Time Name of title
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
OK
MANUAL SKIP
REC
Name
ARD
ZDF
AV2
ARD
AV2
ZDF
ARD
ARD
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[OPTION].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Total : 0
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Properties
OK
Name
ARD
ZDF
AV2
ARD
AV2
ZDF
ARD
ARD
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size:
0MB( 0%)
Date Day Time Name of title
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
Sort
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are shown.
Sort:
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
[Note]
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 68).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 55).
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
6
Register titles and playlists for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0%)
1 Copy Direction
No.
HDD DVD
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
See also “Before copying” (➡ 54).
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
1
2
3
Page 01/01
While stopped
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
OPTION
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Create List
HDD
VIDEO
008
007
0:30(XP)
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10. SAT
---
---
Playlists
Copying titles or playlists
EH770EC.book 55 ページ
---
---
Copy
Cancel All
Source
1 Copy Direction
Previous
HDD
OK
HDD DVD
RETURN
Destination
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
DVD
Start Copying
0
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
“
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
” or
” can be registered.
You can register a multiple number of titles and
playlists on the copying list by repeating
steps 2–4.
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(➡ 56) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press
[OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Next
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
” can
be registered.
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK]
(➡ below, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 56)
Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press
[1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5
Next
Select Previous
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
OK
4
Page 02/02
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and
press [OK].
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
High Speed
3 Create List
OPTION
5 Press [2] to confirm.
7
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 68).
8
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or
“Copy Only” and press [OK].
≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is cancelled.
(Continued on the next page)
RQT9011
55
EH770EC.book 56 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Copying titles or playlists
(Continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 54.
∫ To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time
only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied
at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain
on the HDD.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the
point cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDRW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥Still pictures cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
[+R]DL]
is displayed, but copy cannot be
performed.
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 8, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying.
(➡ 8, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB (0%)
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
RQT9011
56
Size:
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after
copy.
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ 55, right column)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Delete All
Add
Delete
Move
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and
press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ 55, Multiple editing).
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 55, left column)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
8
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 68) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 68) of the Setup menu.
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (➡ 36).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVDVideo”) (➡ 55, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
6
Set “Copy Time”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 7).
∫Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
When the top menu is displayed
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Copying titles or playlists
EH770EC.book 57 ページ
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
[Note]
≥The screen saver on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 55, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
2
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video
Hour
00 Min.
XP
3 Copy Time
Start Copying
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Press OK to change the setting.
OK
RETURN
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
7
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➡ 64).
RQT9011
57
EH770EC.book 58 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Copying still pictures
6
TV
Í
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
DVD
SKIP
CH
Copy
Cancel All
ShowView
1 Copy Direction
HDD DVD
PROG/CHECK
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
No.
PICTURE High Speed
SLOW/SEARCH
3 Create List
:, 9
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
;
OK
RETURN
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[OK].
FU N
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
3,4,2,1
OK
OPTION
FUNCTION
MENU
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK] (➡ 59,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 59)
≥To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 59)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 59)
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
[HDD] [RAM]
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/
AUDIO STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
CD-RW.
To copy pictures recorded on the USB memory
(➡ 59, Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory—Copy All
Pictures)
You can register a multiple number of still pictures on
the copying list by repeating steps 2–3.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
Copying using the copying list
2
3
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
HDD DVD
HDD
Destination
DVD
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
0
You can register a multiple number of folders on the
copying list by repeating steps 4–5.
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
4
5
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
7
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
≥For individual still pictures only
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
Folder
Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK] (➡ 59,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 59)
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 59)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 59)
HDD DVD
2 Copy Mode
No.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
Cancel All
Source
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
2 Copy Mode
Copy
1 Copy Direction
OPTION
∫ To register individual still pictures
EXIT
1
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
New folder
Make a new folder and dub ?
8
001
002
003
-----
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
New folder
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[Note]
RQT9011
58
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, the
folder’s name may be changed from the source folder. It is
recommended that you input a folder name before copying (➡ 51,
Enter Album Name).
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures
[USB] > [HDD] or [RAM]
1
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
While stopped
Insert the USB memory (➡ 13).
The menu is automatically displayed.
USB device
∫ To edit the copying list
Play MP3
Select the item in step 6–3 (for a still picture) or 6–5
(for a folder) (➡ 58, right column)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
SELECT
Delete
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 58)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
(➡ 39, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
If you want to switch to another higher folder (➡ below).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
Folder
Create List
DVD-RAM
100__DVD
0001
0002
0003
0004
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
OK
2
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
Copy All Pictures
3
4
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
and press [OK].
You can also operate with the following steps
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
➡ Go to step 2 (➡ above)
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
∫ To select another folder
Picture (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Add
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added
and press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple editing).
Create List
DVD-RAM
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Delete All
Copying still pictures
EH770EC.book 59 ページ
001
002
003
004
---------
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[Note]
≥The folder name will be changed from the copy source folder. Enter
a folder name on the copy destination after copying (➡ 51, Enter
Album Name).
≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
Folder
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
Page 01/01
Previous
Page 001/001
Picture 0012
Next
OK
RETURN
OK
RETURN
File 0012
OPTION
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115:
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
folders recognizable, while the screen on
the right appears.
1 Press [OPTION] and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select the higher
folder and press [OK].
You cannot register a folder with a
different higher folder to the same
list.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
folder and press [OK].
001
002
003
004
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
Select Folder
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
Press OK to set.
SELECT
OK
RETURN
[Note]
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 39), copying
will stop partway through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
RQT9011
59
EH770EC.book 60 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Copying from a video cassette recorder
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
2
3
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
PAUSE
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
PROG/CHECK
INPUT SELECT
PLAY/x1.3
;
GUIDE
OPTION
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 29), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
¥ REC
AUDIO STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
This unit
DV IN
S VIDEO
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
EXIT
3,4,2,1
OK
When you want to start recording
ShowView
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
∫
CH
Start play on the other equipment.
VIDEO
L/MONO - AUDIO- R
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.
Preparation
1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left column).
2 Turn on the main unit.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 73).
AV3 IN
Yellow White Red
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
S Video
cable§
1
Turn on the DV equipment, and pause play
at the point you want recording to start.
The following screen appears.
DV Auto Rec
Audio/Video
cable
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
Other video equipment
Rec to HDD
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
Rec to DVD
OK
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (➡ 69).
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 68) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 68) of the Setup menu.
About the aspect when recording a programme (➡ 8)
[Note]
≥If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
Manual recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 8, Important notes for
recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 73).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 45).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
1
RQT9011
60
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.
Cancel
SELECT
2
3
4
RETURN
≥When the screen is not displayed
After performing step 1
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].
➡ Go to step 3 (➡ below)
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic
recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left column).
EH770EC.book 61 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Recording music from CD and play on HDD
TV
VOL
Playing recorded music on HDD
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
DELETE ¢
SKIP
STOP
1
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
ShowView
:, 9
∫
;
[HDD]
CH
PLAY/x1.3
6, 5
1
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
3,4,2,1
OK
FU N
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
2
3
FUNCTION
MENU
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Music Server”
and press [OK].
Music Server
HDD
Current playing album
No. and track No./
Playback status/
Elapsed playtime
RETURN
RETURN
OPTION
CREATE
CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
This unit records tracks from a music CD (including a CD-R/CD-RW)
REC REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
to the HDD.
AUDIO
While stopped
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
OK
4
Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
CD
Play Music
Copy Music
SELECT
OK
2
3
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”
and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
You can also operate with the following steps.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1 While stopped, press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music CD” and press [OK].
(Go to step 3 ➡ above)
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be
recorded.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[Note]
≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or
USB memory.
≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
≥Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications
(copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
04
Play
Album Name
2.54
Tracks
10
03
07
07
03
02
01/01
OPTION
Press [3, 4] to select the album and
press [OK].
Play starts from the beginning of the album.
When the last track of an album finishes playing, the first track
of the next album will automatically begin to play and so on.
≥“0” indicates the album currently playing.
≥You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115:
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
While stopped
Track
RETURN
≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
≥Audio quality: LPCM
≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300 (Depends on the
remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
1
003
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
–––
–––
Page
Recording music from a CD to HDD
[CD] > [HDD]
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
Album
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Play stops.
Operations during play
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Pause
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
Press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Skip
During play or while paused, press [:] or
[9].
Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Copying from a video cassette recorder/Recording music from CD and play on HDD
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
∫ To delete an album/To enter the album name
1 While the “Music Server” screen is displayed
Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [OK].
Delete Album:
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You can also delete an album with the following steps.
1 While the “Music Server” screen is displayed
Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [DELETE ¢].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Enter Album Name:
(➡ 65, Entering text)
[Note]
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes while
the Music Server screen is being displayed, the burn protection
screen is displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].
RQT9011
61
EH770EC.book 62 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
HDD and disc management
Setting the protection
[RAM]
DVD
TV
Í
Í
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
4
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
CH
5
PLAY/x1.3
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Protection” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
EXIT
DVD
Management
EXIT
GUIDE
DVD-RAM
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
3,4,2,1
OK
Titles
Used
Disc Name
FUNCTION
MENU
Disc Protection
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
SELECT
RETURN
OK
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
On
Delete all titles
RETURN
Format Disc
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Cartridge-protection
Common procedures
1
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
To Others
ShowView Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
HDD Management
OK
RETURN
3
Music Server
Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management” or “DVD Management”
and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Disc Protection
Off
Delete all titles
SELECT
RETURN
Providing a name for a disc
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(➡ 65, Entering text)
Titles
Used
Disc Name
OK
Format Disc
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment.
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
My favorite
Documentary
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9011
62
PROTECT
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
04
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 62).
Deleting all the contents of a disc—
Format
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 62).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 62)
4
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
7
[Note]
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc
even if you have set protection.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 62)
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”
or “Format Disc” and press [OK].
5
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
HDD and disc management
EH770EC.book 63 ページ
6
[Note]
A message appears when formatting is finished.
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture (JPEG), music or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc unusable.
7
Press [OK].
[Note]
≥When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be
possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9011
63
EH770EC.book 64 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
HDD and disc management
Refer to the control reference on page 62.
[Note]
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVDVideo top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).
After finalising
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 63) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8minute)§ chapters, if
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 62)
4
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
Top Menu List
1
2
Display after finalising
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
4
5
3
6
Before
finalising
After
finalising
Recording/Editing/Entering name
≤
–
Play on other players
–
≤
01
7
8
9
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 47,
Change Thumbnail)
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 62)
4
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [OK].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalising the disc.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 62)
4
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
RQT9011
64
Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
http://www.panasonic-europe.com
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left
column) before creating top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 62)
4
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
7
Press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
[Note]
[Note]
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
7
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Entering text
TV
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
DELETE ¢
∫
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
STOP
CH
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
ShowView
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
;
e.g., entering the letter “R”
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th
row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
3 Press [OK].
EXIT
GUIDE
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
3,4,2,1
OK
OK
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
“Red”
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
3
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
[HDD] [RAM]
Characters
Playlist
64
Album of still pictures
36
Album of music ([HDD])
40
6 M N
7
7 P
8 T
L
7
O
Q
R
U
V
Press [∫] (Set).
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title View
screen and so on.
Disc ([RAM])
64
To end partway
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
Title name for timer recording
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
Title
44
Disc
40
[Note]
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1
K
7
64 (44§)
Title
§
5 J
≥To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢] and press
[OK].
RETURN
“Green”
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
AUDIO
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [OK].
HDD and disc management/Entering text
EH770EC.book 65 ページ
Show Enter Name screen.
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (➡ 64). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
Enter Name
_
Chapter
1_
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Top Menu Preview
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
Chapter 1
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
K L
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
*
N %
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
›
$
4
&
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 32, right
column.
Title
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 46.
Playlist
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 49.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 62.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 on page 50, “To edit
the album”.
Album of music
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 2 on page 61, “To
delete an album/To enter the album name”.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Press the “Red” button or
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Enter Name
“Green” button to select
_
character type and press
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Top Menu Preview
2 A B C
a b c K L
[OK].
*
3 D E F
d e f / N %
“Standard Characters”:
4 G H I
g h i › $ &
5 J K L
j k l 1 0 @
Delete
(➡ left, Alphabet characters,
m n o [
] _
M
N
O
6
v Set
etc.)
7 P Q R S p q r s ( )
t u v { } 8 T U V
“Other Characters”:
9 W X Y Z w x y z \ |
(➡ below, Umlaut characters,
0 LL 9
0 . , ? ! " ' : ; ` ^
Space
accented characters, etc.)
SELECT
OK
RETURN
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
§
¨
©
ª
2 «
¬
-
®
¯
°
±
²
³
´
3 µ
¶
·
¸
¹
º
»
¼ ½ ¾
4 ¿
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å Æ Ç
È
5 É
Ê
Ë
Ï
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Õ
Ì Í
Ö ×
Î
6 Ó Ô
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
ä
å
æ
1
7 Ý
8 ç
Þ
à
á
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
ð
9 ñ
0 û
ò
ó
ß
ô
õ
ö
â
÷
ø
ù
ú
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
Space
ã
RQT9011
65
EH770EC.book 66 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
FUNCTION MENU window
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
1
DVD
TV
Í
Í
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
PAGE
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
AV
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
While stopped
FUNCTION MENU
CH
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
ShowView
Recording
Delete
PROG/CHECK
Copy
To Others
SLOW/SEARCH
OK
RETURN
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
2
EXIT
GUIDE
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
3,4,2,1
OK
OK
OPTION
≥If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following screen
appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [OK].
FUNCTION
MENU
FUNCTION MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [OK].
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
RETURN
Playback
MANUAL SKIP
Recording
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Delete
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
Timer Recording
ShowView Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
HDD Management
USB device
Music Server
TV
“USB device” appears
when a compatible USB
memory device is
connected.
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
“Timer Recording”
appears in countries
where the GUIDE Plus+
system is available.
AV
PAGE
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
CH
ShowView
Child Lock
SKIP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
FU N
OK
OPTION
CTION MENU
OK
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”
disappears.
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
6566
Afar:
6565
Afrikaans:
6570
Albanian:
8381
Amharic:
6577
Arabic:
6582
Armenian:
7289
Assamese:
6583
Aymara:
6589
Azerbaijani:
6590
Bashkir:
6665
Basque:
6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani:
6890
Bihari:
6672
Breton:
6682
Bulgarian:
6671
Burmese:
7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian:
7577
RQT9011
66
Catalan:
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
Gujarati:
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
7185
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
Lingala:
Lithuanian:
Macedonian:
Malagasy:
Malay:
Malayalam:
Maltese:
Maori:
Marathi:
Moldavian:
Mongolian:
Nauru:
Nepali:
Norwegian:
Oriya:
Pashto, Pushto:
Persian:
Polish:
Portuguese:
Punjabi:
Quechua:
7678
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8083
7065
8076
8084
8065
8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sanskrit:
8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi:
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471
Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
EH770EC.book 67 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Changing the unit’s settings
Common procedures
1
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
∫
< OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
SKIP
STOP
Tabs
CH
Setup
ShowView
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
EXIT
OPTION
“Green”
FUNCTION
MENU
5
6
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
“Red”
CTION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FU N
OK
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
press [1].
PAGE
GUIDE
3,4,2,1
OK
3
4
TV
Í
2
While stopped
Menus
Options
Remote Control
Clock
Power Save
Quick Start
DVD 1
Off
On
DivX Registration
Initialize
SELECT
OK
TAB
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the option and
press [OK].
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
“Yellow”
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
FUNCTION MENU window/Child Lock/Changing the unit’s settings
X CH W
Summary of settings
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tabs
Tuning
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Manual Tuning (➡ 71)
Auto-Setup Restart (➡ 72)
Download from TV (➡ 72)
Disc
Settings for Playback
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is
shown.
≥Do not forget your password.
Soundtrack
Subtitle
Menus
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and
disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite
any changes you make here.
≥In case of English/French/German/Italian/
Spanish/Dutch/Swedish languages, when you
make download from TV, and Country setting
of Auto-Setup in plug-in, the language
(“Soundtrack”/“Menus”) will be same and
“Subtitle” will set to “Automatic”.
≥Enter a code (➡ 66) with the numbered
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
When the selected language is not available
on the disc, the default language is played.
There are discs where you can only switch the
language from the menu screen (➡ 37).
≥8 No Limit: All DVD-Video can be played.
≥1 to 7:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
≥0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Unlock Recorder
≥Change Level
≥Change Password
≥Temporary Unlock
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
≥English
≥Spanish
≥Dutch
≥Swedish
≥Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥Automatic: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will automatically
appear if available on that disc.
≥English
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
≥Spanish
≥Dutch
≥Swedish
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥German
≥English
≥Spanish
≥Dutch
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥French
≥Swedish
≥Italian
(continued on the next page)
RQT9011
67
EH770EC.book 68 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Changing the unit’s settings
(continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 67.
Tabs
Menus
Settings for Recording
Disc
(continued) ≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP
mode (➡ 27, Recording modes and approximate recording
times).
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.
≥When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with
“Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be
recorded in the original aspect ratio.
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
≥EP (6 Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
≥EP (8 Hours):You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when
using “EP (8 Hours)”.
≥Automatic: The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including when
recording started at a commercial, etc.).
≥16:9
≥4:3
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Rec for High Speed Copy
≥On: You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press [2, 1] to
select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R,
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded titles.
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set in
+RW using high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is
“Aspect for Recording” (➡ above).
restricted (➡ right).
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
Audio Selection” (➡ below).
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
≥You are no longer able to switch the audio when watching
This setting is effective when recording from a television
a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment),
this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).
or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
≥Off
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
≥Maximum
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high≥Normal (Silent):
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this
4X discs).
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for
copying will double (approximately).
Picture
Sound
RQT9011
68
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 73).
≥On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.
≥Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play
(➡ 84, Frames and fields).
≥Automatic
≥Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
(The picture is coarser.)
≥Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and finer.)
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (Play x1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
≥Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
≥On
≥Off
Bilingual Audio Selection
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type
when:
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ 69, “Audio Mode for
XP Recording”).
≥M 1
≥M 2
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ 69).
EH770EC.book 69 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96
kHz or 88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency of
over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.
≥On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
≥Off: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when
the connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Dolby Digital
≥Bitstream:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
DTS
Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes
the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
[Note]
Not making the proper settings
may result in noise or some trouble
for digital recording.
MPEG
Display
≥Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS
logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS
logo.
Changing the unit’s settings
Digital Audio Output
Sound
(continued) Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 16).
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
≥PCM: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG
decoder.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
mode.
≥Dolby Digital (➡ 84)
≥LPCM (➡ 85)
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
that of normal XP mode recordings.
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 68).
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s
DV input terminal (➡ 60).
≥Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).
≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
≥Mix:
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 68).
Language
≥English
≥Deutsch
≥Français
≥Italiano
≥Nederlands
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages. ≥Español
≥Svenska: only appears when “Sverige”, “Danmark”, “Norge” or
“Suomi” is selected in the Country setting menu
(➡ 20).
On-Screen Messages
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.
≥Automatic
≥Off
Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
≥On
≥Off
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 71) to “On”.
≥Bright
≥Dim
≥Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily
if a button is pressed. While using this mode, the
standby power consumption can be reduced.
(continued on the next page)
RQT9011
69
EH770EC.book 70 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Changing the unit’s settings
(continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 67.
Tabs
Menus
Connection TV Aspect (➡ 20)
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Set to match the type of ≥16:9: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
television connected.
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side
picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (➡ 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style (➡ 85).
Progressive (➡ 24)
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set
“AV1 Output” to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)”.
TV System (➡ 73)
HDMI Settings§
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be
changed. However if you are concerned about output picture
quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.
≥On
≥Off
≥PAL
≥NTSC
≥576i/480i
≥576p/480p
≥720p
≥1080i
≥1080p:
When setting video output to “1080p”, we
recommend using a Panasonic HDMI cable 5 meters
or less in length to prevent video distortion.
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you
≥Automatic: Automatically selects the output resolution best
need to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV.
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
If this unit is connected to an HDTV through other
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).
equipment, it must also be 1080p compatible.
Aspect for 4:3 Video
≥4:3: Picture output expands left and right.
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set
how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.
≥16:9: Picture is output as original aspect with side
panels.
≥HDMI and Optical
≥Optical Only: Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier
with an optical digital audio cable and connected
to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to enjoy
the highest quality of audio from discs (➡ 16).
VIERA Link
≥On
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an ≥Off: Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
AV1 Output
≥Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.
signal.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”
≥S Video (with component):
for component output (progressive output).
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
signal.
When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 (without
≥RGB 1 (without component):
component)”.
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
≥If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”. signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
≥RGB 2 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit
only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
AV2 Settings (Set to match the connected equipment.)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥RGB
AV2 Input
≥RGB/Video
≥Video
≥S Video
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording
RGB output from external equipment.
AV2 Connection
≥Decoder:When a decoder is connected to descramble the
This setting is fixed with “Ext” if you set “TV System” to
scrambled signals (e.g., C+decoder).
When the VCR or a digital/satellite receiver is
“NTSC” (➡ 73).
≥Ext:
connected.
Ext Link
≥Ext Link 1: When a digital/satellite receiver which transmits a
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
special control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart
“NTSC” (➡ 73).
cable is connected.
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by
the control signal.
≥Ext Link 2: When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
When it turns on, recording starts.
When it turns off, recording stops.
Digital Audio Output
§
RQT9011
70
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to
change the settings.
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Remote Control (➡ 25)
≥DVD 1
≥DVD 2
≥DVD 3
Clock (➡ 73)
Power Save
≥On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
standby (➡ 86).
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 69).
≥Off:
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
–When the unit is off, Pay TV programmes cannot be watched turned to “Off”.)
on the TV because the signal from the connected decoder is
not looped through. To watch them, turn on the unit.
Quick Start
≥On
≥Off:
Standby power consumption is less than when this is set
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
to “On”.
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record
(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to
something.
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
“Off”.)
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVDRAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
DivX Registration
≥You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 41).
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
≥Yes
≥No
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
Default Settings
≥Yes
≥No
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, country settings, language settings, disc language settings, ratings
level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
Others
Changing the unit’s settings
EH770EC.book 71 ページ
Tuning
1
2
3
4
If you select “Yes” and press [OK], the following screen
appears.
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and
press [1].
Setup
Manual Tuning
Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Manual Tuning
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Manual
Tuning” and press [OK].
Manual Tuning
If you delete programme position
of Host channel, GUIDE Plus+ data
is also deleted. Continue?
Yes
Manual Tuning
Pos Name
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Delete
Move
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ARD
ZDF
N3
HR3
BR3
Ch
4
2
5
8
10
Pos Name
Ch
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Add
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
To add a blank programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Green” button.
To move a TV station to another programme position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
the “Yellow” button.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to
which you want to assign the TV station and press [OK].
[Note]
≥When the unit connected to a Q Link compatible TV with a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable sets itself automatically (➡ 20), only
deletion of the programme position can be performed.
≥If you delete programme position of Host Channel, the GUIDE
Plus+ data is also deleted.
(continued on the next page)
No
RQT9011
71
EH770EC.book 72 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Changing the unit’s settings
(continued)
Auto-Setup Restart
Refer to the control reference on page 67.
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 20) fails for some
reason.
∫ To change the tuning settings for individual
programme position
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 71)
6
Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
to select a
programme position
and press [OK].
Manual
Tuning
SELECT
Pos
Name
Channel
Fine Tuning
Video System
Audio Mode
Mono
Title Page
5
1
ARD
4
Auto
Auto
BG
Off
301
The confirmation screen appears.
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a Q
Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV and
copied through this convenient function.)
RETURN
RETURN : leave
Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Pos
To change the programme position in which
the TV stations are assigned
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the
number of the desired programme position and
press [OK].
Name
To enter or change the name of a TV station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [OK].
If the station name needs a blank space, select
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
Channel
To enter newly available TV stations or change
the channel number of an already tuned TV
station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the channel number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].
Fine Tuning
Video
System
Audio Mode
Mono
Title Page
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [OK].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
To select the video system type
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the
picture lacks colour, and press [OK].
Auto:
This unit automatically distinguishes
PAL and SECAM signals.
PAL:
For receiving PAL signals.
SECAM: For receiving SECAM signals.
RQT9011
72
6
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
≥If the country setting menu appears on the television
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[OK].
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped,
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
When the GUIDE Plus+ system setting message appears.
≥If you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Go to step 2 on page 21.
≥If you do not want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [OK].
Television picture appears. Setup is complete.
List of TV Reception Channels
Channel
indication
To select the audio reception type
If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select
“BG” or “L” and press [OK].
BG: PAL B.G.H/SECAM B.G
L: SECAM L, L’
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if
you want to record the normal (mono) sound
during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM broadcast,
and press [OK].
To enter the Teletext title page for a channel
Entering title page number allows the unit to
automatically record programme and station
names.
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the
number and press [OK].
≥To find the correct title page for the station, refer
to its Teletext TV guide.
You can make the following two settings by selecting the external
input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3) in step 6.
≥Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)
In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match
the connected equipment.
≥Title Page (Auto/Off)
Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup
Restart” or “Download from TV” and
press [OK].
Italy
France
2–4
2–4
5 – 10
5 – 10, G – J
(172.00 to
220.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
E2 – E10
Other
Countries
E2 – E12
11 – 12
H1 – H2
—
13 – 20
A–H
—
—
21 – 69
E21 – E69
E21 – E69
E21 – E69
74 – 78
S01 – S05
—
S1 – S5
80
S1
—
M1
81 – 89
S2 – S10
B–F
(100.00 to
172.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
M2 – M10
90 – 99
S11 – S20
K – Q (220.00
to 300.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
U1 – U10
S21 – S41§
(Hyperband)
S21 – S41
(299.25 to
467.25 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
S21 – S41
(Hyperband)
121 – 141
§
TV Channel
Only for 8 MHz channel raster
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
TV System
Manual Clock Setting
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the
HDD.
1
2
3
4
5
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”
and press [OK].
PAL
NTSC
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
SELECT
Connection
Others
OK
1
2
3
4
5
6
RETURN
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of
“Automatic” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the TV system
and press [OK].
≥PAL (factory preset)
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL
60.
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
≥NTSC
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television
programmes cannot be recorded properly.
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD.
7
≥In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory
for approximately 60 minutes.
TV System
Setup
6
Usually, the unit’s setup function (➡ 20) automatically adjusts the
clock to correct time. Under some reception conditions, however,
the unit cannot set the clock automatically.
In this case, follow the operation steps below to manually set the
clock.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Clock
Automatic Off
Time
15 : 45 : 39
∫ To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit simultaneously for 5 or more seconds.
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be
used.
Date
1 .
8 . 2007
Number
0
9
CHANGE
SELECT
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
7
Press [2, 1] to select the item you
want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
8
Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
9
Press [OK] when you have finished
the settings.
The clock starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Changing the unit’s settings
EH770EC.book 73 ページ
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[Note]
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic”
in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time
correction function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted
several times every day.
RQT9011
73
EH770EC.book 74 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Messages
On the television
Page
Authorisation Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
Cannot finish recording completely.
≥The programme was copy-protected.
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded.
—
—
27
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
73
Cannot record to the disc.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
10
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
39
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
≥Use a new disc.
40, 41
Unable to format.
Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.
47, 52,
63
—
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
—
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
39
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
47, 51,
52, 63
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
56, 59
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised DVDR, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
4–5
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
52
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)
41
$
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
—
This is a non-recordable disc.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTION MENU.
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
63
—
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unnecessary titles.
RQT9011
74
EH770EC.book 75 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
DVD 
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
25
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
GUIDE
≥GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded.
22
HARD ERR§
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
—
NoERAS
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
10
10
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
PLEASE WAIT§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait
until the message disappears.
—
PROG FULL§
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
33
SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the
numbers are examples.
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151
hours”.
—
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
63
UNSUPPORT§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
4–6
7
F74
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
—
F75
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
—
U59
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.
—
U61
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.
—
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–The HDMI cable is too long. Please use a cable 5.0 meters or less.
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
—
U76
≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright
protection.
—
U80
U81
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now
press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
—
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.
78
Hor F
≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
—
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.
Messages
Page
78–83
66
§
The message are alternately displayed.
RQT9011
75
EH770EC.book 76 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
The television has a Scart terminal and
component video input terminal. Which
should I connect with?
≥If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube) we recommend using the Scart
terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB
compatible television.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.
14–16
Is my television progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
—
≥You cannot play DVD-Video if its region number does not include “2” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
16
Cover
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.
≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
4–6
≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still
pictures (JPEG).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
6, 39
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW
compatibility with this unit.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
—
—
—
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording
is usually not possible.
—
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- ≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
recorded on this unit be played on other
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
equipment?
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
—
—
Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion: On
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
69
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.
38
≥Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the
programme.)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
53
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
76
Page
16, 17
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs
bought in another country?
RQT9011
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.
—
68
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
GUIDE Plus+
Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only
available after approx. 2 hours?
≥The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited. Depending on the country, signal
quality and number of channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is ready
can vary.
Page
—
The Host Channel in France is Canal
Plus. Do I have to sign a contract with
Canal Plus in order to be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system?
≥No, you can use the GUIDE Plus+ system without a contract.
—
How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data
updated and when?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the television station
transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at
2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit is turned off.
22
Is it possible to programme a recording,
with a start and end time that are
different from the GUIDE Plus+ system?
≥You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording
menu.
32
Does the GUIDE Plus+ system support
VPS/PDC?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system works independently of VPS/PDC. However, you can
programme TIMER recordings with VPS/PDC in the Timer Recording menu.
34
How can I cancel a TIMER
programming?
≥The “F” symbol appears in the GUIDE Plus+ when a Timer Recording is programmed
with the GUIDE Plus+ system. To cancel a Timer Recording programming, press [PROG/
CHECK]. Select the desired entry and press [DELETE ¢].
33
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data
via a connected satellite receiver or a
Set Top Box?
≥No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set
Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming.
32, 35
What happens when I unplug my unit
from the power outlet?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from the
power supply for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost. Make sure
that the time is set again appropriately.
—
What happens if my postal code
changes, e.g. if I move?
≥Change the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ Setup menu. If necessary, perform a full
Auto-Setup. Saved GUIDE Plus+ data may be lost.
23
USB
What can or cannot be done using the
USB port on this unit?
Music Server
What will happen if I try to record the
same CD multiple times?
≥You can play MP3 or still picture files on a USB memory, and copy still pictures to the
HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.
≥Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this
unit.
≥Connections of digital cameras or camcorders through USB are not guaranteed.
≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
≥New album will be made following the existing album.
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD ≥No, you cannot.
to the disc or USB memory.?
Frequently asked questions
EH770EC.book 77 ページ
41, 42,
59
—
—
—
7
—
—
RQT9011
77
EH770EC.book 78 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
≥A sound is heard when the HDD goes into energy save mode, or
operations are slow to respond in energy save mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the energy save
mode (➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an
unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
Power
No power.
The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].
Page
≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
14, 15
35
The unit switches to standby
mode.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
—
The power is turned off
automatically.
≥If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, or
connected this unit to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will
be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.
18
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
69
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
≥Set the clock.
73
The time recorded on the disc and
the available time shown do not
add up.
The displayed time of this unit is
different from the actual
recording time or MP3 recording
time.
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
increase in disc space.
≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
—
—
The clock is not correct.
≥Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not work.
In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting
does not work, set the time manually.
73
Compared to the actual recorded
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
—
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
—
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It
can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
—
Status messages do not appear.
≥Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.
69
The grey background does not
appear.
≥Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.
69
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
—
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.
≥By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
≥Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.
45
Displays
—
—
—
TV screen and video
Screen size is wrong.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
RQT9011
78
70
70
68
68
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
TV screen and video (continued)
The recorded title is stretched
vertically.
Page
≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
recording mode.
–If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
–If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed
Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”.
–By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
There is a lot of after-image when ≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
playing video.
When playing DVD-Video using
≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
progressive output, one part of
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
There is no apparent change in
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the onscreen menus.
The images from this unit do not ≥Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal, VIDEO OUT terminal,
appear on the television.
S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Picture is distorted.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds
to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
≥When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV
system.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
The picture is distorted during
≥You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavourable weather
conditions.
play, or video will not play
≥The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in
correctly.
the following situations:
–between titles recorded with different recording modes.
–between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
–between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
–between playlist chapters.
—
—
68
68
45
45
Troubleshooting guide
EH770EC.book 79 ページ
—
14–17
—
—
73
—
—
—
—
Sound
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
Cannot switch audio.
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
amplifier if you have connected one.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected
with an HDMI cable.
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”).
≥The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables.
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
14–17,
69
38
45
—
—
—
70
—
68
—
69
68
16, 17,
69
—
RQT9011
79
EH770EC.book 80 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Troubleshooting guide
Operation
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
Page
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
control.
24
25
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time
for more than 5 seconds.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.
24–25
24
66
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.
HDD activation is slow.
≥The HDD is in energy save mode.
9
Cannot eject disc.
≥The unit is recording.
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.
—
35
Cannot download channel
presets from the television.
Startup is slow.
80
—
—
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
Cannot tune channels.
RQT9011
11
11
≥Check the connections.
≥You must connect to a television equipped with the Q Link function with a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable to download channel presets.
≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
26, 36
—
—
—
66
14–15
—
71
—
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Recording, timer recording and copying
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD
Management.
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
HDD and then copy.
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded
with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
Page
4, 5
63
62
84
47, 52,
63
—
47, 52,
63
—
—
—
—
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
Timer recording does not work
properly.
≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the
programme.
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording
list is not on.)
≥Set the clock.
≥The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be correct. It is
recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes.
33
≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive.
≥When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L”
disappears.)
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
33
VPS/PDC does not work.
≥VPS/PDC will activate when this unit is set to standby mode. While this unit is on, recording
starts and finishes at times you set initially.
34
VPS/PDC does not work when
making a timer recording using a
SHOWVIEW number.
≥If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two SHOWVIEW numbers, use the
SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC.
32
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
—
Timer recording does not stop
even when [∫] is pressed.
≥Select the input channel (“AV2”, “AV3” or “DV”) for the equipment you have connected.
14–15,
60
—
33
73
30
35
—
63
The programme name and the
recorded title do not match.
≥There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has
the old programme name.
—
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
disc using the high speed mode.
≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The
default setting is “On”).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot
perform high-speed copy.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD Recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
68
≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.
—
An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.
≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
—
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
60
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.
Troubleshooting guide
EH770EC.book 81 ページ
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
60
RQT9011
81
EH770EC.book 82 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Troubleshooting guide
Play
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
DVD-Video is not played.
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
No subtitles.
Angle cannot be changed.
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
Quick View does not work.
The resume play function does
not work.
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does
not work.
It takes time before play starts.
Picture stops.
Cannot see the beginning of the
title played.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
≥Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
Page
36
10
4–6
—
—
68
—
41
—
—
—
5
67
Cover
—
37
—
44
≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset.While the disc tray is open, press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
—
—
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–press [∫] several times.
–open the disc tray.
–[CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the power.
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.
≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during
search.
≥These functions do not work with finalised discs.
≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
recorded on the disc.
≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
≥(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the
beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.
—
—
—
73
—
—
73
—
—
—
Edit
Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.
≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
52
—
Cannot edit.
≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
52
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
10
4–6
Cannot create chapters.
—
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a
start point.
Cannot delete chapters.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
47
Cannot create a playlist.
≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.
—
≥If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not be copied.
—
—
—
Music
Tracks could not be copied to
the HDD.
RQT9011
82
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Still pictures
Page
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit is standing by for
linked timer recording with external equipment.
—
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc.
—
63
USB
The contents of the USB memory
cannot be read.
≥Check that the USB memory device is inserted correctly.
≥The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the unit. (The
contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)
≥The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible
with this unit.
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥USB memories connected using a USB extension cable may not be recognized by this unit.
≥The USB host function of this unit may not work with some USB memory devices.
≥USB memories with storage capacity of more than 32 GB may not work in some instances.
≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
13
7, 39
≥Check whether GUIDE Plus+ system setup was performed in full.
The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several times each day. When the unit is first
connected, the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately one day before you can
display the television programme list.
≥Check whether the clock is properly set.
≥If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE Plus+ system may not
be able to receive any data.
21–23
39
—
—
—
—
7
Troubleshooting guide
EH770EC.book 83 ページ
GUIDE Plus+
The GUIDE Plus+ System does
not receive any data.
73
—
“No Data” is displayed for some
or all stations.
≥These stations may not have been able to be identified automatically.
For these stations, select the “On” in the sub menu under “Editor” and assign the correct
reference station manually.
≥Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.
22
The GUIDE Plus+ information is
not displayed properly.
≥The reference station is not assigned correctly in “Editor”.
Select the correct reference station.
≥There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+ system provider or
station provider.
22
The GUIDE Plus+ data transfer
was interrupted.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.
≥The programme information may be incomplete.
—
—
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not
updated.
≥The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode
(EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.
≥Make sure that the time is set correctly.
≥Check whether “Off” is set under “Night Download” and change the setting in GUIDE Plus+.
—
—
23
≥Programme the Timer recording manually or via SHOWVIEW.
32
≥Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when
the power for the main unit is set to On.
≥Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
≥Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
≥If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a
power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV
(VIERA) on again.
2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on
again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is
displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.
—
“No Data” is displayed in the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
—
—
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
70
—
—
To reset this unit
≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning
settings, clock settings, country settings, language settings, disc language settings, ratings
level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
71
To reset the ratings level
settings
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
—
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated
≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)
—
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset
71
—
RQT9011
83
EH770EC.book 84 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Glossary
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc
(DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30
frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are
stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where
still pictures (JPEG) are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
u
Frame
r
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
RQT9011
84
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan:The sides are cut off so the picture fills
the screen.
Letterbox:Black bands appear at the top and bottom
of the picture so the picture itself appears in
an aspect ratio of 16:9.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Glossary
EH770EC.book 85 ページ
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RQT9011
85
EH770EC.book 86 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format§1
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format§1
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format§1
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R:
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R DL:
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW:
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
+R DL:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
+RW:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
Recording time
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
Maximum Approx. 710 hours with 400 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 90 hours, SP: Approx. 175 hours
LP: Approx. 345 hours, EP: Approx. 530 hours/710 hours
Playable discs
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3, JPEG, DivX
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, MP3, JPEG, DivX
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD§2, MP3, JPEG, DivX)
SVCD§2
Internal HDD capacity
400 GB
Optical pick-up
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD
780 nm wave length
DVD
662 nm wave length
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
NORSK
Bølgelengde:
CD
780 nm
DVD
662 nm
Laserstyrke:
Ingen farlig stråling sendes ut
Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
Audio in:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)
Input level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input impedance:
More than 10 k≠
Audio out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Output level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output impedance:
Less than 1 k≠
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
RQT9011
86
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.
Video
Video system:
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
Recording system:
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB in (PAL):
AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Television system
Tuner system
Channel coverage
PAL-BGH
SECAM-BG
(CCIR)
VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy)
UHF: 21–69
CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),
S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41
SECAM-L, L’
(France)
VHF: 2–10
UHF: 21–69
CATV: B–Q (100.5 to 299.5 MHz),
S21–S41 (299.25 to 467.25 MHz)
RF converter output:
USB
USB port:
USB standard:
Format:
DV input
Others
Region code:
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkDkH):
Mass:
Not provided
Type A: 1pc
USB 2.0 Full Speed
FAT 16, FAT 32
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
‚2
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 34 W
430 mmk330 mmk59 mm
Approx. 4.2 kg
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)
Approx. 11 W (Quick Start mode)
[Note]
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
§1
§2
It is compatible to a DVD-Video format after finalised.
Conforming to IEC62107
This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji VCD” available on the
market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to
IEC62107.
EH770EC.book 87 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Safety precautions
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Specifications/Safety precautions
Placement
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment (private households)
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points, where they will
be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return your products to your
local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. Please contact your
local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS
2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard
playback of DivX® media files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)
subject of various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
and/or its related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR
ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM
SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE
PLUSi SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV
GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH
THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION,
EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM.
RQT9011
87
EH770EC.book 88 ページ
２００７年７月２３日　月曜日　午後４時２０分
Index
Adjust the audio quality
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adjust the picture quality
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Album (Still picture)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Audio
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 34
AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Channel
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 46
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Amplifier, system component . . . . . . . . 16
Digital receiver, satellite receiver,
decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–17
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . 14–16
Copy
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
USB (Still pictures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 47
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Delete
Album
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 69, 70
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 36, 42, 46, 50
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39–41, 84
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
49
50
46
64
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 64, 84
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 63, 84
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 27
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . 66
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 21–23, 30–31
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–19, 70
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 70, 84
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 68
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 42–43, 85
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 67
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 67
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (digital/satellite receiver)
— EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 70
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 85
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41, 85
Music Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Name
Album
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 47
Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Ratings level settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 68
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–34
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SHOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 29
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Subtitle
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–34
Tuning
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
USB
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Play
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–19, 70
VPS/PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 45, 85
Properties
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Protection
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH.
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, F.R. Germany
p
RQT9011-L
F0707KJ0